Samsung SGH T959HABTMB User Manual

P O R T A B L E  
M O B I L E  
Q U A D - B A N D  
P H O N E  
User Manual  
Please read this manual before operating your  
phone, and keep it for future reference.  
Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Phone?  
For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS System (Automated Response System) at:  
®
®
Nuance , VSuite™, T9 Text Input, and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications, Inc., or its  
affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.  
®
ACCESS and NetFront™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and other countries.  
®
The Bluetooth word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are registered  
trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.  
microSD™ and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association.  
®
Openwave is a registered Trademark of Openwave, Inc.  
Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Android Market, Gmail, Google Mail, Google Maps, Google Talk, Picasa, and YouTube  
are trademarks of Google Inc.  
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.  
©
Swype and the Swype logos are trademarks of Swype, Inc. 2010 Swype, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Open Source Software  
Some software components of this product incorporate source code covered under GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser General  
Public License (LGPL), OpenSSL License, BSD License and other open source licenses. To obtain the source code covered under the open  
source licenses, please visit:  
.
Dynamic Noise Suppression from Audience  
Your phone is equipped with an advanced voice processing chip that delivers clear mobile calls by suppressing background noise,  
intermittent sounds (like a siren or nearby conversation), and echoes, allowing you to hear and be heard nearly anywhere.  
How Does It Work?  
Based on the intelligence of the human hearing system, the technology:  
Captures, evaluates and distinguishes all the sound signals surrounding your phone, and the person you're speaking with.  
Then isolates the primary voice in conversation and filters out the background noise - so the person you're calling hears only your voice, without  
disturbing background noise.  
Dynamically equalizes and adjusts voice volume to optimize your calling experience, so you can hear clearly and don't need to speak louder to overcome  
surrounding noise.  
The noise suppression technology is built-in and already enabled in your new mobile phone. So it's ready to provide unsurpassed voice  
clarity with every call.  
Disclaimer of Warranties; Exclusion of Liability,  
EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT, THE  
PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS", AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER  
WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; THE DESIGN, CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT; THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT; THE  
WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE  
REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION  
MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE  
PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF  
THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR BENEFITS.  
SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS, OR  
YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE.  
USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY.  
Table of Contents  
1
2
3
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) Regulations for  
4
Section 1: Getting Started  
This section explains how to get started with your phone by  
installing and charging the battery, installing the SIM card and  
optional memory card, and setting up your voice mail.  
Note: Instructions in this manual are based on default settings, and may vary  
from your phone, depending on the software version on your phone,  
and any changes to the phone’s Settings.  
Before using your phone for the first time, you’ll need to install  
and charge the battery and install the SIM card. The SIM card is  
loaded with your subscription details, such as your PIN, available  
optional services, and many other features. If desired, you can  
also install an SD card to store media for use with your phone.  
Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this User Manual start with the  
phone unlocked, at the Home screen.  
All screen images in this manual are simulated. Actual displays may  
vary, depending on the software version of your phone and any  
changes to the phone’s Settings.  
Understanding this User Manual  
Special Text  
The sections of this manual generally follow the features of your  
phone. A robust index for features begins on page 241.  
Throughout this manual, you’ll find text that is set apart from the  
rest. These are intended to point out important information, share  
quick methods for activating features, to define terms, and more.  
The definitions for these methods are as follows:  
Also included is important safety information that you should  
know before using your phone. This information is available near  
the back of the guide, beginning on page 211.  
Notes: Presents alternative options for the current feature, menu, or  
sub-menu.  
This manual provides navigation instructions according to the  
default display settings. If you select other settings, navigation  
may be different.  
Tips: Provides quick or innovative methods, or useful shortcuts.  
Important: Points out important information about the current feature  
that could affect performance.  
Unless otherwise specified, all instructions in this manual  
assume you are starting from the Home screen and using the  
available keys.  
Warning: Brings to your attention important information to prevent  
loss of data or functionality, or even prevent damage to your phone.  
Getting Started  
6
     
Text Conventions  
To remove the battery cover:  
1. Hold the device firmly and locate the cover release latch.  
This manual provides condensed information about how to use  
your phone. To make this possible, the following text conventions  
are used to represent often-used steps:  
2. Place your fingernail in the opening and firmly “pop” the  
cover off the device (similar to a soda can).  
Arrows are used to represent the sequence of  
selecting successive options in longer, or  
repetitive, procedures.  
Release Latch  
Example: “From the Home screen, press  
(
Menu  
)
Settings  
Wireless  
and network  
Bluetooth settings.”  
Battery Cover  
The battery, SIM card and SD card are installed under the  
battery cover.  
Important!: Before removing or replacing the battery cover, make sure  
the phone is switched off. To turn the phone off, hold down  
the  
key until the power-off image displays, then tap  
Power off  
.
7
     
To replace the battery cover:  
2. Carefully slide the SIM card into the SIM card socket until  
the card clicks into place. Make sure that the card’s gold  
contacts face into the phone and that the upper-left angled  
corner of the card is positioned as shown.  
Position the battery cover over the battery compartment  
and press down until you hear a click.  
SIM Card Overview  
Important!: Before removing or replacing the battery cover, make sure  
the phone is switched off. To turn the phone off, hold down  
the  
key until the power-off image displays, then tap  
Power off  
.
The SIM card is loaded with your subscription details such as  
your telephone number, PIN, available optional services, and  
many other features.  
Install the SIM Card  
Important!: The SIM card and its information can be easily damaged by  
scratching or bending, so be careful when handling, inserting, or  
removing the card. Keep all SIM cards out of reach of small  
children.  
Installing and Removing the SIM card  
To install the SIM card:  
1. Confirm the battery is not currently installed within the  
battery compartment. The battery can block the proper  
installation of the SIM card into the slot.  
Remove the SIM Card  
Getting Started  
8
     
To remove the SIM card:  
3. Firmly press the card into the slot and make sure that it  
catches with the push-click insertion. For more information  
1. If installed, remove the battery from its compartment  
(1 and 2). The battery can block the proper removal of the  
SIM card from the slot.  
2. Carefully slide the SIM card out of the SIM card socket.  
Important!: Be sure to align the gold contact pins on the card with the  
phone’s contacts.  
Note: If the card is not inserted correctly, the phone will not detect it and nor  
service will be available. If this happens, turn off the phone, remove  
the card, and reinstall the card in the correct orientation.  
Installing the microSD Memory Card  
Your phone supports an optional (external) microSD™ or  
microSDHC™ memory card for storage of media such as music,  
pictures, video and other files. The SD card is designed for use  
with this mobile phone and other devices.  
Note: microSD memory cards include capacities of up to 2GB.  
The microSDHC™ memory card types can range from 4GB to up  
to 32GB.  
Note: This device supports up to a 32GB microSDHC memory card.  
1. Remove the battery cover.  
2. Orient the card with the gold strips facing down.  
9
       
Removing the microSD Memory Card  
1. Remove the battery cover.  
Installing Battery  
2. Firmly press the card into the slot and release it. The card  
should pop partially out of the slot.  
3. Remove the card from the slot.  
Battery  
Before using your phone for the first time, install the battery and  
charge it fully.  
Important!: Before removing or replacing the battery cover, make sure  
the phone is switched off. To turn the phone off, hold down  
the  
key until the power-off image displays, then tap  
Power off  
.
Removing Battery  
Installing the Battery  
1. Slide the battery into the compartment (1) so that the tabs  
on the end align with the slots at the bottom of the phone,  
making sure the connectors align.  
2. Gently press down to secure the battery (2).  
Removing the Battery  
Grip the battery at the top end (3) and lift it up and out of  
the battery compartment (4).  
Getting Started  
10  
         
Charging the Battery  
Note: Verify that the battery is installed prior to connecting the wall charger.  
If the battery is not installed and the wall charger is connected, the  
handset power cycles continuously preventing proper operation.  
Failure to unplug the wall charger before you remove the battery, can  
cause the phone to become damaged.  
Your phone is powered by a rechargeable Li-ion battery. A wall  
charger, which is used for charging the battery, is included with  
your phone. Use only approved batteries and chargers. Ask your  
local Samsung dealer for further details.  
Before using your phone for the first time, you must fully charge  
the battery. A discharged battery recharges fully in approximately  
4 hours.  
Important!: Although the battery comes partially charged. It is recommended  
you fully charge the battery before using your device for the first  
time.  
1. Connect the USB cable to the charging head.  
Charging Head  
2. Slide open the Charger/Accessory jack cover (1).  
3. Insert the USB cable into the device’s Charger/Accessory  
jack (2).  
4. Plug the charging head into a standard AC power outlet.  
The device turns on with the screen locked and indicates  
both its charge state and percent of charge.  
Incorrect  
Warning!: While the device is charging, if the touch screen does not function  
due to an unstable power supply unplug the USB power adapter  
from the power outlet or unplug the USB cable from the device.  
USB Cable  
Correct  
11  
   
Important!: If your handset has a touch screen display, please note that a  
touch screen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your  
finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using excessive force or a  
metallic object when pressing on the touch screen may damage  
the tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For more  
Low Battery Indicator  
When the battery level is low and only a few minutes of talk time  
remain, a warning tone sounds and the “Low battery” message  
repeats at regular intervals on the display. In this condition, your  
phone conserves its remaining battery power, by dimming the  
backlight.  
Incorrect  
Correct  
When the battery level becomes too low, the phone automatically  
turns off.  
Note: This illustration displays both the correct and incorrect orientation for  
connecting the charger. If the charger is incorrectly connected,  
damage to the accessory port will occur therefore voiding the phone’s  
warranty.  
5. When charging is finished, first unplug the charger’s power  
plug from the AC wall outlet, then disconnect the charger’s  
connector from the phone.  
Getting Started  
12  
 
Animated wallpapers use processing power, memory, and more power.  
Change your Live Wallpaper to a non-animated Wallpaper gallery or  
Gallery image.  
Extending Your Battery Life  
Active applications, light levels, Bluetooth usage, and GPS  
functionality all act to drain your battery. The following is a list of  
helpful tips that can help conserve your battery power:  
Power Control  
Use the Power Control shortcut bar.  
Reduce your backlight on time.  
Turn Bluetooth off when not in use.  
Turn Wi-Fi off when not in use.  
Active applications, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, GPS, Synchronization,  
Location consent, or the LCD Brightness functionality all act to  
drain your battery.  
The Power Control shortcut bar was designed to quickly activate  
(turn on), or deactivate (turn off) those functions or applications  
that use the most battery power.  
Deactivate the GPS when not needed. Most applications using this  
function will periodically query the GPS satellites for your current  
location; each query drains your battery.  
1. From the Home screen,  
touch and hold an empty  
area until the Add to Home  
screen menu displays.  
Do not wait until your battery is completely depleted before charging  
your device. Repeating this process of a complete discharge and  
recharge can over time reduce the storage capacity of any battery.  
Turn off Automatic application sync.  
2. Tap Widgets  
Power  
Use the Power Control Widget to deactivate hardware functions such  
as Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, GPS, Synchronization, or LCD brightness setting.  
control. The Power Control  
shortcut is added to the  
current screen.  
Check the Battery use screen to review what features or functions  
have been consuming your battery resources.  
Check the Running Services and close any unnecessary applications.  
Use the Task Manager feature to end/shutdown background  
applications that are still running. These minimized applications can,  
over time, cause your device to “slow down”.  
13  
           
With a SIM card installed  
3. Tap any of the icons on the Power Control shortcut bar to  
activate/deactivate the feature.  
1. Press and hold  
until the phone switches on.  
The phone searches for your network and after finding it,  
you can make or receive calls.  
Note: A green bar displayed beneath the icon means the application is active  
(turned on). The green bar is removed from beneath the icon when the  
feature is deactivated (turned off).  
Note: The display language is preset to English at the factory. To change the  
Switching the Phone On or Off  
If you do not have a SIM card installed the first time you turn on  
the device, the Insert SIM card to make calls message displays  
and an animated tutorial shows you how to install the SIM card.  
2. Press and hold  
until the Phone options screen  
appears.  
At this point you can make an emergency call with the phone but  
normal cell phone service is not available.  
3. Tap Power off  
(
).  
Without a SIM card installed  
Locking and Unlocking the Phone  
Tap Emergency call to make an emergency call.  
By default, the phone screen locks when the backlight turns off.  
– or –  
Place your finger on the screen and swipe the glass in any  
of the directions shown unlock the phone.  
1. Tap Skip to ignore the SIM Card installation tutorial and  
configure various phone settings. Follow the on-screen  
procedures.  
Note: Selecting Location consent may drain battery power. For more  
2. Tap Finish to end the tutorial.  
Getting Started  
14  
           
Creating a New Google Account  
You should create a Google Account when you first use your  
device in order to fully utilize the functionality. This account  
provides access to several device features such as Gmail, Google  
Maps, Google Search, and the Android Market applications.  
Before you are able to access Google applications, you must  
enter your account information. These applications sync between  
your device and your online Google account.  
To create a new Google Account from your phone:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(
Market).  
Create to begin.  
2. Read the introduction and tap Next  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to create a Google  
Account.  
– or –  
If this is not the first time you are starting the phone, tap  
(Gmail).  
Note: You can choose to configure lock settings to prevent unauthorized use  
Note: If you already have a Google account, you only need to sign in.  
15  
   
To create a new Google Account from the Web:  
Retrieving your Google Account Password  
1. From a computer, launch a Web browser and navigate to  
A Google account password is required for Google applications. If  
you misplace or forget your Google Account password, follow  
these instructions to retrieve it:  
2. On the main page, click Sign-in  
Account  
.
Sign up for a new Google  
1. From your computer, use an Internet browser and navigate  
.
3. Follow the on-screen prompts to create your free account.  
2. Click on the Can’t access your account? link.  
4. Look for an email from Google in the email box you  
provided, and respond to the email to confirm and activate  
your new account.  
3. From the Forgot your password? section, enter your full  
Gmail address and click Submit. Follow the password  
recovery procedure.  
Signing into Your Google Account  
1. Launch an application that requires a Google account  
(such as Android Market or Gmail).  
Voice Mail  
Setting Up Your Voice Mail  
Your device automatically transfers all unanswered calls to  
voicemail, even if your device is in use or turned off. As soon as  
your battery is charged and the SIM card inserted, activate your  
voicemail account.  
2. Click Next  
Sign in.  
3. Tap the Username and Password fields and enter your  
information.  
4. Tap Sign in. Your device communicates with the Google  
Important!: Always use a password to protect against unauthorized access.  
servers to confirm your information.  
5. If prompted, create a new Gmail username by entering a  
prefix for your @gmail.com email address.  
Getting Started  
16  
             
For new users, follow the instructions below to set up voice mail:  
Accessing Your Voice Mail From Another Phone  
1. Dial your wireless phone number.  
Note: Voicemail setup may be different depending on your network.  
2. When you hear your voicemail greeting, press the asterisk  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and then touch and hold  
key on the phone you are using.  
the key until the phone dials voice mail.  
1
3. Enter your passcode.  
You may be prompted to enter a password.  
Visual Voicemail  
2. Follow the tutorial to create a password, a greeting, and a  
Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who left a  
voicemail message, and listen to the any message they want  
without being limited to chronological order.  
display name.  
Accessing Your Voice Mail  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Visual Voicemail ).  
2. Read the on-screen information and tap Next  
(Applications) ➔  
You can access your Voice Mail by either pressing and holding  
(
on the keypad, by using the phone’s Application icon,  
1
Done to  
then touching the Voice Mail application. To access Voice Mail  
activate Visual Voicemail if this is the first time it was  
accessed.A list of the voicemail messages displays.  
using the menu:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and then touch and hold  
until the phone dials voice mail.  
1
Note: You must subscribe to Visual Voicemail service to use this feature.  
Charges may apply. Please contact your service provider for further  
details.  
1
Note: Touching and holding  
will launch Visual voicemail is it is already  
active on your phone.  
3. Tap an on-screen voicemail message to play it back.  
2. When connected, follow the voice prompts from the voice  
mail center.  
17  
       
• Downloaded displays any installed packages or applications from  
the Market that are taking up memory space. Tap Uninstall to  
remove them from your phone.  
Task Manager  
Your phone can run applications simultaneously, with some  
applications running in the background.  
• RAM, which displays the amount of current RAM (Random Access  
Memory) currently being used and allow you to Clear memory for  
either Level 1 or Level 2 (both Level memory locations).  
Sometimes your device might seem to slow down over time, and  
the biggest reason for this are background applications. These  
are applications that were not properly closed or shutdown and  
are still active but minimized. The Task Manager not only lets you  
see which of these applications are still active in the background  
but also easily lets you choose which applications are left  
running and which are closed.  
• Storage displays a visual graph indicating the available and used  
space within the Random Access Memory (RAM), Program, and  
External SD card.  
• Help provides additional battery saving techniques.  
Shutting Down an Currently Active Application  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Task Manager  
(
).  
Note: The larger the number of applications running on your phone, the  
larger the energy drain on your battery.  
2. From the Active applications tab, tap Exit to close selected  
applications or tap Exit all to close all background running  
applications.  
Task Manger Overview  
From the Home screen, tap  
(Applications) ➔  
Task Manager  
(
).  
– or –  
Press and hold  
then tap Task Manager. This screen  
contains the following tabs:  
• Active applications display those currently active applications  
running on your phone.  
Getting Started  
18  
 
Section 2: Understanding Your Phone  
This section outlines key features of your phone. It also describes  
the phone’s keys, screen and the icons that display when the  
phone is in use.  
5 Megapixel camera and video with autofocus, multi shot  
8x digital zoom  
Brilliant widescreen Super AMOLED™ display  
MP3 player with Multitasking features  
Assisted GPS (TeleNav GPS Navigation)  
Webkit-based browser  
Features of Your Phone  
Your phone is lightweight, easy-to-use and offers many  
significant features. The following list outlines a few of the  
features included in your phone.  
Downloadable applications from the Android Market  
Up to 32GB expandable memory slot  
Touch screen with virtual (on-screen) QWERTY keyboard  
®
Front Facing camera and preloaded Qik application for Video Chat  
High Speed Packet Access Plus (HSPA+) delivering data speeds faster  
than the current 3G network technology.  
Mobile Hotspot Capability  
Android 2.3 Gingerbread  
Pre-loaded e-reader applications such as: Google Books™  
Preloaded with the movie INCEPTION  
T-Mobile™ TV HD  
®
®
Compatible with Adobe Flash  
®
Wi-Fi Capability  
USB Tethering-capable  
Bluetooth enabled  
Samsung Media Hub  
®
E-Reader with preloaded Amazon Kindle™ Application  
®
Full integration with Google applications (Gmail, YouTube, Google  
Maps)  
Slacker Radio  
®
Wi-Fi Calling for improved network coverage  
®
Multiple Messaging Options: Email, Audio Postcard, Instant Messaging,  
Picture Messaging, Google Talk™, Google Search, Video Messaging,  
Text Messaging, Predictive Text  
Samsung Media Hub  
Supports synchronizing with a corporate email account  
19  
       
The following list correlates to the illustrations.  
1. USB Power/Accessory connector allows you to connect a  
power cable or optional accessories such as a USB/data  
cable.  
Front View  
The following illustrations show the main elements of your  
phone:  
15 14 13  
12  
11  
1
2
2. Strap holder is used to connect a carrying strap to the  
phone.  
3.  
Volume key allows you to adjust the ringer volume in  
3
standby mode (with the phone open) or adjust the voice  
10  
9
When receiving an incoming call:  
volume during a call.  
Pressing the volume key down mutes the ring tone.  
Pressing and holding the volume key rejects the call.  
4. Menu key displays a list of options available for the current  
screen. From the Home screen it displays Add, Wallpaper,  
Search, Notifications, Edit, and Settings options.  
5. Home key displays the Home screen when pressed.  
8
7
6.  
during phone calls and allows other  
Microphone is used  
callers to hear you clearly when you are speaking to them.  
It is also used to make voice note recordings.  
4
5
6
Understanding Your Phone  
20  
   
7. Quick search is used to search the device for applications,  
contact information, or searches the internet for  
information.  
14. Proximity Sensor detects how close an object is to the  
surface of the screen. This is typically used to detect when  
your face is pressed up against the screen, such as during  
a phone call.  
8. Back key redisplays the previous screen or clears entries.  
While talking on the phone, the sensor detects talk activity and  
locks the keypad to prevent accidental key presses.  
9. Display shows all the information needed to operate your  
phone, such as the connection status, received signal  
strength, phone battery level, and time.  
15. Light Sensor lets you use the ambient light level to adjust  
the screen brightness/contrast.  
10. Power/End key ends a call or switches the phone off and  
on. Press and hold for two seconds to toggle Silent mode,  
Flight mode, or to turn the Power off.  
In a bright light condition (outdoors), the sensors cause the device  
to increase the brightness and contrast for better viewing.  
In dim light conditions, the device increases the screen brightness  
to compensate.  
11. Front Facing Camera allows you to take pictures while  
facing the screen and allows you to video conference.  
12. Headset jack allows you to connect a hands-free headset  
so you can listen to music.  
13. Receiver allows you to hear the other caller and the  
different ring tones or sounds offered by  
your phone.  
21  
Back View of Your Phone  
Phone Display  
The following illustration shows the external elements of your  
phone:  
Your phone’s display provides information about the phone’s  
status, and is the interface to the features of your phone. The  
display indicates your connection status, signal strength, battery  
status and time. Icons display at the top of the phone when an  
incoming call or message is received and also alerts you at a  
specified time when an alarm was set. The screen also displays  
notifications, and Application (or shortcut) bar with four icons:  
Phone, Contacts, Messaging, and Applications.  
1
Signal strength  
Connection Status  
Battery status  
Status Bar  
Time  
2
Google search  
1. Camera lens is used to take photos.  
Notification  
area  
2. External speaker allows you to hear ringers, music, and  
other sounds offered by your phone.  
Status  
area  
Home Screen  
Shortcuts  
Primary  
Shortcuts  
Understanding Your Phone  
22  
       
Display settings  
Indicates there is no signal available.  
Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone.  
Displays when there is a system error or alert.  
Displays when a call is in progress.  
In this menu, you can change various settings for the for the  
wallpaper, cube, brightness or backlight.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Status Bar  
(Applications) ➔  
(
The Status Bar shows information about the connection status,  
signal strength, phone battery level, and time, and displays  
notifications about incoming messages and calls and other  
actions.  
Displays when a call is on hold.  
Displays when you have missed an incoming call.  
Displays when the speakerphone is on.  
This list identifies the icons you see on your phone’s display  
screen:  
Indicator Icons  
This list identifies the symbols you’ll see on your phone’s display  
and Indicator area:  
Displays when Call forwardingis set toAlways forward.  
Displays your current signal strength. The greater the  
number of bars, the stronger the signal.  
Displays your current battery charge level.  
Icon shown is fully charged.  
Indicates that the Flight Mode is active. You cannot  
send or receive any calls or access online information.  
23  
               
Displays your current battery is 100 percent charged.  
This icon is followed by an audible beep.  
Displays when your phone is communicating with the  
HSPA+ network.  
100%  
Displays your battery is currently charging.  
Displays when the phone is connected to a computer  
using a supported USB cable connection.  
Displays your current battery charge level is  
very low.  
Displays when there is a new text message.  
Shows your current battery only has three percent  
power remaining and will immediately shutdown.  
Represented as a blinking icon.  
Displays when an outgoing text message has failed to  
be delivered.  
Displays when there is a new voicemail message.  
Displays when connected to the EDGE network.  
Displays when there is a new visual voicemail  
message.  
Displays when your phone is communicating with  
the EDGE network.  
Displays in the notifications window when there is  
a new Email message.  
Displays when connected to the 3G network.  
Displays when an alarm is set.  
Displays when your phone is communicating with  
the 3G network.  
Displays when the Sound profile is set to Silent mode  
and Vibrate is set to Always or Only in silent mode.  
Displays when connected to the HSPA+ network.  
Understanding Your Phone  
24  
Displays when data synchronization and application  
sync is active and synchronization is in progress  
for Gmail, Calendar, and Contacts.  
Displays when your phone’s GPS is on and  
communicating.  
Displays when the Wi-Fi calling feature is active.  
Minutes used while connected to the Wi-Fi network  
count against available rate plan minutes.  
Displays when the Sound profile is set to Silent  
mode and Vibrate is set to Never or Only when  
not in silent mode.  
Displays when the Wi-Fi calling feature is active and  
you are using it with within your current active call.  
Displays when Bluetooth technology is active and  
enabled.  
Displays when the external SD card (internal  
microSD) has been disconnected (unmounted) from  
the phone and is now ready for either removal or  
formatting.  
Displays when the Bluetooth technology is active  
and communicating with an external device.  
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and  
communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP).  
Displays when the External SD card is being prepared  
for mounting to the device. This is required for  
communication with the External SD card.  
Displays when Wi-Fi is active and there is an available  
open wireless network.  
Displays when the phone has detected an active USB  
connection and is in a USB Debugging mode or the  
microSD card has been improperly removed.  
Displays when the Mobile AP Hotspot feature is active  
Displays when the USB Tethering feature is active and  
For more details on configuring your phone’s settings, see  
25  
Notification Bar  
Note: The Notifications panel can also be opened on the Home screen by  
pressing and then tapping Notifications  
.
The Notification area indicates new message events (data sync  
status, new messages, calendar events, call status, etc). You can  
expand this area to provide more detailed information about the  
current on-screen notification icons.  
Clearing Notifications  
To clear all notifications from the Notification panel:  
1. Tap the status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then  
drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the  
Notifications panel.  
1. Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then  
drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the  
Notifications panel (1).  
2. Tap a notification entry to open the associated  
2. Tap Clear. The notifications are cleared from the panel.  
application (2).  
Accessing Additional Panel Functions  
In addition to notifications, this panel also provides quick and  
ready access to five device functions. These can be quickly  
activated or deactivated.  
The following functions can either be activated (blue) or  
deactivated (white): Wi-Fi  
,
Bluetooth  
,
GPS, Sound/Vibration, or  
Auto rotation  
.
Understanding Your Phone  
26  
   
Settings  
The Settings menu can also be accessed by pressing  
tapping Settings  
(
) provides quick access to the device’s settings menu.  
Function Keys  
Your phone comes equipped with four main function keys that  
can be used on any screen: Menu Home, Back, and Search.  
and then  
.
,
Home Key  
Menu Key  
The Home key (  
the 7 total available screens).  
) takes you back to your Home screen (#4 of  
The Menu key (  
) activates an available menu function for the  
current screen or application. When on the Home screen, the  
following menu options are available:  
Press and hold to launch the Recent Apps/Task Manager  
Add  
Widgets, Shortcuts, Folders, and Wallpapers.  
Wallpaper ) lets you to customize the current screen’s  
(
) adds one of the following functions to a selected screen:  
(
Back Key  
wallpaper image by choosing from either Home screen Wallpaper, Live  
Wallpaper or Wallpaper gallery).  
The Back key (  
) returns you to the previously active screen.  
If the on-screen keyboard is currently open, this key closes the  
keyboard.  
You can obtain images from either your Pictures folder, from any of the  
available images within the device’s Wallpaper gallery, or from the  
animated Live Wallpapers.  
Search  
search for a key term both on the phone and online.  
Notifications ) allows you to expand popup notifications area to  
(
) displays the Google Search box that you can use to  
(
provide more detailed information about the current on-screen  
notification icons.  
Edit  
(
) allows you to add or remove extended screens from your  
device. You can have up to eight extended screens.  
27  
   
Search Key  
Using Google Search  
The Search key (  
) displays the Google Search box that can  
Use the Google Search box to manually search for a term on both  
your device and on the Web.  
be used to search for either a key term both on the phone and  
online. In some instances, this key opens a search box specific  
only to the current application.  
1. Press  
to launch the Google Search box.  
to select a search area:  
2. Tap  
Search  
Voice Search  
Options  
• All searches your device, the Web, and the Android Market for your  
search term.  
(speech to text)  
Searchable  
• Web searches for your term only on the Web using the Google  
search engine.  
Search  
Items  
Field  
• Apps searches for your term only within the Android Market.  
• Contacts searches for your term only within your current Contacts  
entries.  
• Searchable items launches the Searchable items menu where you  
can enable/disable categories from which to search within.  
1. Press  
– or –  
to launch the Google Search box.  
3. Enter a search term and tap a match from the list of  
suggestions, phone search results, or previously chosen  
search matches. Once touched, the item opens in the  
appropriate application.  
Press  
and tap  
.
2. Tap  
to launch the Voice Search function.  
– or –  
Tapping Voice Search  
(
) lets you speak into your  
device's microphone to enter a search term.  
Understanding Your Phone  
28  
     
Using Additional Voice Search Functions  
send email to [recipient] [subject] [body] allows you to open your  
email account, address and compose a new email message.  
map of [location] allows you to view a map of an area via Google  
maps. Use either an Address name, Business name, zip code, or other  
navigation information.  
For more information, refer to:  
.
From an open Voice Search dialog, speak the following words to  
access additional features such as:  
go to [website] allows you to navigate to any component of your  
device.  
voice actions (such as: [your query]) allows you to search the web by  
speaking the search parameters.  
note to self [message] allows you to search for a note save to your  
Memo Pad.  
send text to [recipient] [message] allows you to open the Messaging  
screen.  
directions to [location] using your current location, allows you to  
receive directions to a selected destination.  
listen to [artist/song/album] allows you to begin listening to the  
selected song on Slacker radio.  
navigate to [address/city/business name] allows you to receive  
directions via Google maps™. Use either an Address name, Business  
name, business type, or other navigation information to get the desired  
directions.  
call [business name] [plocation] allows you to open the phone  
dialer and automatically dial a business entry and location such as  
“call Vini’s Pizza Plano”.  
call [contact name] [phone type] allows you to open the phone dialer  
and automatically dial a current contact and specify the category entry  
such as “call Pat S home”.  
29  
   
Notification area displays those icons associated with end-user  
notifications such as: email messages, calls (missed, call in progress),  
new voicemail, upcoming event, USB connection, emails, and  
Text/MMS messages.  
Home Screen  
The Home screen is the starting point for using the applications  
on your phone. There are seven available panels, each populated  
with default shortcuts or applications. You can customize each of  
these panels.  
These notifications appear at the top-left of the screen (within the  
Status bar area) and display important user information.  
Status Bar  
This information can be accessed by either swiping down from the  
Status bar (page 26) or by accessing the Notifications panel [  
>
Notifications  
(
)].  
Google search  
bar/Widget  
Notification  
Status area displays those icons associated with the status of the  
device such as communication, coverage, Bluetooth, 4G and Wi-Fi  
communication, battery levels, GPS, etc.  
area  
Home Screen is a customizable screen that provides information  
about notifications and device status, and allows access to application  
Widgets.  
Status  
area  
Home Screen  
Extended Home Screens extend beyond the current visible screen  
width to provide more space for adding icons, widgets, and other  
customization features.  
Shortcuts  
Primary  
Shortcuts  
There are seven available extended screens (panels) each of which  
may be populated with its own shortcuts or widgets. These screens  
share the use of the three Primary Shortcuts.  
The current screen is indicated at the top by a larger circle. Up to seven  
(7) total screens are available.  
Understanding Your Phone  
30  
         
Primary Shortcuts: are four shortcuts present throughout all of the  
available screens and can be used to both navigate within the device  
or launch any of the following functions:  
Note: Both the status bar and primary shortcuts are visible across all  
screens.  
Google search is an on-screen Internet search engine powered by  
Google™. Touch to access the Voice Search feature where you can  
verbally enter a search term and initiate an online search.  
Widgets are self-contained on-screen applications (not shortcuts).  
These can be placed onto any of the available screens (Home or  
extended).  
Phone  
Call logs, Favorites, and Voicemail).  
Contacts ) launches the Contacts-related screens (Contacts,  
Groups, History, and Updates).  
Messaging ) launches the Messaging menu (create new  
(
) launches the phone-related screen functions (Dialer,  
(
(
messages or open an existing message string).  
Shortcuts are icons that launch available device applications such as  
Camera, YouTube, Voicemail, Contacts, Phone, Email, Market, etc.  
These function the same as shortcuts on your computer.  
Applications/Home toggles functionality between the Home and  
Application screens.  
Although some may already be found on the Extended Home screens,  
the majority can also be found within the Applications screens.  
The Application screens can be accessed by tapping Applications  
Tap Applications  
with every available local application.  
(
) to access the Application screens loaded  
While in the Applications screens, tap the Home icon (  
easily return to the Home screen.  
) to  
(
) from the Primary shortcuts area.  
Shortcuts can be removed from a screen and added back any number  
of times.  
31  
   
As you transition from screen to screen, the screen counter  
(located at the top) displays the current panel number in a circle.  
Screen Navigation  
Using the touch screen display and the keys, you can navigate  
the features of your phone and enter characters. The following  
conventions are used in this manual to describe the navigation  
action in the procedures.  
Widget  
Navigating Through the Screens  
The following terms describe the most common hardware and  
on-screen actions.  
Counter displays  
the currently  
Press and hold  
Tap  
Touch and hold  
active screen  
Understanding Your Phone  
32  
     
Press and hold: Pressing relates to use of the hardware keys and  
buttons to select or activate an item. For example: press the  
Navigation key to scroll through a menu. Some buttons and keys  
require you to press and hold them to activate a feature, for example,  
you press the Lock key to lock and unlock the phone.  
Swipe or slide  
and Drag  
Flick  
Tap: Use a brief touch to select items on the display or to enter text on  
the virtual QWERTY keyboard. For example: touch an Application icon  
to open the application. A light touch works best.  
Touch and hold: Touch and hold an icon or key to open the available  
options, or to access a pop-up menu. For example: press and hold  
from the Home screen to access a menu of customization options.  
Flick: Move your finger in lighter, quicker strokes than swiping. This  
finger gesture is always used in a vertical motion, such as when  
flicking through contacts or a message list.  
Swipe or slide: Quickly drag your finger vertically or horizontally  
across the screen. This allows you to move the area of focus or to  
scroll through a list. For example: slide your finger left or right on the  
Home screen to scroll among the seven panels.  
Rotate  
Drag: Press and hold your finger with some pressure before you start  
to move it. Do not release your finger until you have reached the target  
position.  
Rotate: Automatically change the screen orientation from portrait to  
landscape by turning the device sideways. For example: rotate to  
landscape orientation when entering text, to provide a larger keyboard,  
or when viewing web content to minimize scrolling.  
33  
Pinch: “Pinch” the screen using your thumb and forefinger to zoom  
out when viewing a picture or a Web page. (Move fingers inward to  
zoom out.)  
Menu Navigation  
You can tailor the phone’s range of functions to fit your needs  
using both menus and applications. Menus, sub-menus, and  
features are accessed by scrolling through the available  
on-screen menus. Your phone defaults with seven home screens.  
Spread: “Spread” the screen using your thumb and forefinger to zoom  
in when viewing a picture or a Web page. (Move fingers outward to  
zoom in.)  
Navigating Through the Application Menus  
Pinch (Zoom Out)  
There are four default Application Menus available. As you add  
more applications from the Android Marketplace, more screens  
are created to house these new apps.  
1. Press  
Application Menu displays.  
To close the Applications screen, tap  
2. Sweep the screen to access the other menus.  
and then tap  
(Applications). The first  
or press  
.
Spread (Zoom In)  
3. Tap any of the on-screen icons to launch the associated  
application.  
Note: These screens can be re-arranged in any desired order. For more  
Understanding Your Phone  
34  
   
Using Sub-Menus  
Using Context Menus  
Sub-menus are available from within most screen and  
applications.  
Context menus (also called pop-up menus) contain options that  
apply to a specific item on the screen. They function similarly to  
menu options that appear when you right click your mouse on  
your desktop computer.  
1. Press  
phone screen.  
2. Tap an option.  
. A sub-menu displays at the bottom of the  
Touch and hold an item on-screen to open its context  
menu.  
Context  
Menu  
Sub-Menu items  
35  
     
Accessing Recently-Used Applications  
Accounts and sync  
1. Press and hold the  
to open the recently-used  
Allows you to add applications and determine which  
type of account information you want to synchronize  
applications window.  
Note: This recent applications screen also provides access to the Task  
Manager  
.
Add to Home  
2. A pop-up displays the six most recently used applications.  
3. Tap an icon to open the recent application.  
Applications  
Allows you to add Widgets, Shortcuts, Folders, or  
Wallpapers to the current screen.  
For more information about Add to Home, see To add a  
The Application menu provides quick access to the most  
frequently used applications. Applications display on each of the  
three panels on the Applications screens.  
Alarm & Clocks  
Allows you to set an alarm, configure and view the  
World clock, use a stopwatch, or set a timer. The  
applications display in a tabular format and quickly  
accessed with the touch of a finger.  
The following table contains a description of each application  
available via both the Primary shortcuts area and via the  
Applications screens. If the application is already described in  
another section of this user manual, then a cross reference to  
that particular section is provided. For information on navigating  
through the Applications icons, see “Navigating Through the  
Application Menus” on page 34.  
For more information refer to Alarms & Clocks on  
guide.  
Understanding Your Phone  
36  
       
AllShare  
Calculator  
Allows you to share your on-device media content  
with other external devices using DLNA (Digital Living  
Network Alliance) and built-in AllShare™ technology.  
Samsung’s AllShare makes staying connected easy.  
Launches the on-screen calculator application. The  
calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions;  
addition,subtraction,multiplication,anddivision.Youcan  
also use this as a scientific calculator.  
Amazon Kindle  
Calendar  
Opens the Amazon Kindle™ store that provides access  
to thousands of online digital books and publications.  
These documents can be downloaded directly to  
Launches a calendar application that syncs to your  
Facebook™, Google™, or Microsoft Exchange work  
calendars.  
Call Logs  
Amazon MP3  
Provides a list detailing all the calls that have been  
missed,received,ordialed.Formoreinformation,referto  
Launches the Amazon MP3 music download service  
where you can download DRM-Free (digital rights  
management) MP3 formatted songs and albums.  
Camcorder  
In addition to taking photos, the built-in camera also  
doubles as a camcorder that also allows you to record,  
view, and send high definition videos. For more  
Books  
Use GoogleBooks toreadover 3millionebooksonthego.  
37  
       
Camera  
Downloads  
Launches the built-in 5.0 megapixel camera application  
from where you can take a picture with either the front or  
rear facing cameras.  
Provides quick access to tabs containing a list of your  
current downloaded files (Internet and Other).  
DriveSmart  
Note: An SD card must be inserted before the camera will take  
DRIVE  
SMART  
and store photos.  
Launches the DriveSmart application that can be used to  
reduce distractions from your phone by silencing  
notifications, routing calls to voicemail and customizing  
auto responses to both callers and text message  
respondents notifying them that your driving.  
Car Home  
Configures the phone’s user interface to be easier to use  
Email  
Provides access to both your Outlook (Exchange Server-  
based) work email and Internet email accounts (such as  
Contacts  
The default storagelocation forsavingphonenumbersto  
your Contacts List is your phone’s built-in memory.  
Facebook  
Desk Home  
Launches the Facebook application. For more  
Configuresthe phone’suser interfacetomimic adesktop  
Understanding Your Phone  
38  
     
Files  
Inception  
Lets youview supported image files and textfiles on your  
microSDcard.Organizeandstoredata,images,andmore  
in your own personal file folders. Files are stored to the  
memory card in separate (user defined) folders.  
This movie is preloaded on the microSD card included  
with this phone. Just insert the microSD card, tap the  
Home screen icon and enjoy. For more information, refer  
Latitude  
Gallery  
Lets you see your friends’ locations and share yours  
with them. The application also lets you see your  
friends’ locations on a map or in a list. It also lets you  
send instant messages and emails, make phone calls,  
and get directions to your friends’ locations.  
Displays a Gallery of camera images and video stored in  
Gmail  
Provides access to your Gmail account. Google Mail  
(Gmail)isaweb-basedemailservice.Gmailisconfigured  
when you first set up your phone. For more information,  
Layar  
Works by using a combination of the mobile  
phone’s camera, compass and GPS data to identify  
the user’s location and field of view, retrieve data  
based on those geographical coordinates, and  
overlay that data over the camera view.  
Google Search  
Providesanon-screenInternetsearchenginepoweredby  
39  
 
Maps  
Messaging  
Launches a Web-based dynamic map that helps you find  
local businesses, locate friends, view maps and get  
Provides access to text and multimedia messaging (SMS  
Mini Diary  
Market  
Allows you to create a mini diary where you can add a  
photo, and text to describe an event or other memorable  
life event.  
Allows you to find and download free and for-purchase  
applications on Android Market. For more information,  
Music Player  
Media Hub  
Launches the built-in Music Player that allows you  
to play music files that you have stored on your  
microSD card. You can also create playlists. For more  
Provides one-stop access to the hottest movies and TV  
programs that you can rent or buy and watch anytime,  
My Account  
Memo  
Provides you with account specific information such as:  
current status, Activity, Set Alerts, Bill Summary, Plan  
Services, and FAQ’s Info. For more information, refer to  
Creates new text memos. For more information, refer to  
Understanding Your Phone  
40  
           
My Device  
Settings  
Allowsyoutoconfigure devicesettings, view Personalize  
your CallerTunes, Ringtones, or Wallpapers, View Quick  
Tools,Support,andbatterystorageinformation.Formore  
Accesses the device’s built-in Settings menu. For more  
Slacker  
Navigation  
Slacker offers free, internet radio for mobile phones.  
Swype Tips  
Launches a Web-based navigation application.  
Caution!: Traffic data is not real-time and directions may be  
wrong, dangerous, prohibited, or involve ferries.  
Provides an on-screen video tutorial that teaches you  
how to use Swype text input method. For more  
News & Weather  
T-Mobile TV HD  
Launches a Web-based news and weather feed based  
Allows you to watch live mobile TV on your phone. This  
application is a subscription service. For more  
Places  
Talk  
Displays company logos on a layer of Google Maps.  
When viewing an area you can quickly locate a business  
or person, find out more information about the business,  
see coupons, public responses, and more. For more  
Launches a Web-based Google Talk application that  
lets you chat with family and friends over the Internet for  
41  
     
Task Manager  
Videos  
Use Task Manager to see which applications are running  
on your phone, and to end running applications to extend  
battery life.  
Launches your device’s built-in video application  
that plays video files stored on your microSD card.  
Visual Voicemail  
TeleNav GPS  
VisualVoicemailenablesuserstoviewalistofpeoplewho  
left a voicemail message, and listen to the any message  
they want without being limited to chronological order.  
This driving aid provides both audible and visual  
navigation instructions for GPS navigation. For more  
ThinkFree Office  
Voice Dialer  
ThinkFree Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office  
compatible office suite. This application provides a  
central place for managing your documents online or  
offline.  
Launches your device’s built-in voice recognition  
software, called Voice Dialer, to dial a phone number in  
your Contacts or to launch phone functions. For more  
Voice Recorder  
Video Chat  
Allows you to record an audio file up to one minute long  
and then immediately send it as a message. For more  
Allows you to record and share live videos on your device  
with your friends, family, and your favorite social  
Understanding Your Phone  
42  
     
Voice Search  
YouTube  
Launches your phone’s built-in voice recognition  
software and initiates a Google search based on the  
Launches the YouTube webpage via the browser.  
Customizing Your Screens  
Web  
You can customize the Home screens (panels) to display the  
Widgets, Shortcuts, Folders, or Wallpapers. For example, one  
screen could contain the Music Player shortcut and other forms  
of media, while another screen might contain communication  
apps such as Gmail and IM.  
Openthebrowsertostartsurfingtheweb.Thebrowseris  
fully optimized and comes with advanced functionality to  
enhance the Internet browsing feature on your phone.  
You can customize your Home screen by doing the following:  
Wi-Fi Calling  
Adding, Deleting, and Rearranging screens  
Adding and Removing Shortcuts  
Adding and Removing Widgets  
Creating Folders  
Provides the ability to use your available Wi-Fi data  
connection to make outbound calls that count against  
your minutes. Similar to VOIP (Voice Over IP). For more  
Changing the Background (Wallpapers)  
Write and Go  
Use write and go to jot down an idea, then decide what  
format you want to use: Text message (SMS)/Multimedia  
message (MMS), email, calendar, or memo.  
43  
           
Adding and Deleting Screens  
To add a screen:  
1. Press  
and then tap Edit  
(
).  
Your phone comes with seven screens. You can delete these  
screens and then add them back later.  
2. Tap the Add icon (  
). The newly added screen appears  
as the last page.  
Note: These screens can be deleted and re-arranged.  
3. Press  
to return to the main Home screen.  
Important!: Your phone can only contain at most seven screens and at least  
Rearranging the Screens  
one screen.  
1. Press  
and then tap Edit  
(
).  
To delete a screen:  
2. Touch and hold a screen and then drag it into its new  
location. Upper-left is screen position #1 and bottom-right  
is screen position #7.  
1. Press  
then tap Edit  
2. Touch and drag the  
and  
(
).  
Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts  
undesired screen down  
The device comes with four Primary shortcuts: Phone, Contacts,  
Messaging, and Applications/Home. As long as the menu is  
displayed in a Customizable grid, you can replace the Phone,  
Contacts, and Messaging shortcuts with other applications so  
you access the shortcuts that are most frequently used.  
to the Remove tab  
(
).  
3. Press  
to return to  
the main Home screen.  
1. Press  
and then tap Applications  
and then tap View type  
(
).  
2. Press  
Customizable grid  
.
Understanding Your Phone  
44  
       
3. Press  
and then tap Edit. A box outline then appears  
To add a shortcut from the Applications screen:  
1. Press to go to the  
Home screen.  
around the application icons.  
4. Scroll through the list and locate the desired application.  
2. Select a location (screen)  
for your new shortcut by  
scrolling across your  
available screens until  
you reach the desired  
one.  
5. Touch and hold the on-screen icon, then drag it over one of  
the four primary shortcuts to replace it.  
The new primary shortcut displays at the bottom of the screen. and  
the previous primary shortcuts switches places with your selected  
icon.  
6. Press  
and then tap Save  
.
7. Tap  
to return to the Home screen.  
3. Tap Applications  
(
) to  
Managing Shortcuts  
reveal all your current  
available applications. By  
Note: To move a shortcut from one screen to another, you must carefully  
touch and hold the shortcut and slowly drag it to the edge of the  
screen. As the shortcut turns light blue, you can begin to move it to the  
adjacent screen.  
default, applications are displayed as an Alphabetical grid.  
4. Scroll across the screens and locate your desired  
If this does not work, delete it from its current screen. Activate the new  
screen and then add the selected shortcut.  
application.  
5. Touch and hold the on-screen icon. The new shortcut then  
appears to hover over the current screen.  
6. While still holding the on-screen icon, position it on the  
current screen. Once complete, release the screen to lock  
the shortcut into its new position.  
45  
   
To add a shortcut via the Add to Home screen:  
1. Press to go to the  
Home screen.  
Adding and Removing Widgets  
Widgets are self-contained applications that can be placed on  
any screen. Unlike shortcuts, widgets appear as applications.  
To add a Widget:  
2. Touch and hold an empty  
1. Press  
to go to the Home screen.  
area of the screen.  
2. Touch and hold an empty area of the screen.  
3. From the Add to Home  
screen window tap  
3. From the Add to Home screen window tap Widgets  
.
Shortcuts  
.
4. Tap an available Widget to place it on your current screen.  
4. Tap a selection from the  
To remove a Widget:  
1. Touch and hold a  
Widget until it unlocks  
from the current  
screen.  
available list.  
To delete a shortcut:  
1. Press  
to go to the Home screen.  
2. Touch and hold the desired shortcut. This unlocks it from  
its location on the current screen.  
2. Drag the widget over  
the Remove tab (  
)
3. Drag the shortcut over the Remove tab (  
) and release  
and release it.  
it.  
As you place the Widget  
into the Trash, both items  
turn red.  
Understanding Your Phone  
46  
       
This action doesn’t delete the Widget, it just removes it from the  
current screen.  
Renaming a folder  
1. Tap the desired folder you want to rename.  
To place a widget onto a different screen:  
2. With the folder open, touch and hold the Folder title bar  
(top of the Folder window) until the Rename folder pop-up  
displays.  
1. Touch and hold the widget until it becomes transparent.  
2. Drag it to the edge of your screen.  
3. Slowly drag it past the edge of the screen until it turns light  
3. Tap the folder name field, enter a new title for this folder  
blue.  
and tap OK  
.
4. Drag the widget to its desired position on the new screen.  
5. Repeat these steps to continue moving it to other screens.  
Creating and Managing a Folder  
Deleting a folder  
1. Touch and hold a desired folder. This unlocks it from its  
location on the current screen.  
Folders hold items that you want to organize and store together  
on the workspace.  
2. Drag the folder over the Remove tab (  
) and release it.  
To create a new on-screen folder:  
1. Press  
to go to the Home screen.  
2. Touch and hold an empty area of the screen.  
3. From the Add to Home screen window tap Folders  
.
4. Tap an available folder type and place it on the current  
screen.  
47  
       
Managing Wallpapers  
Wallpapers consist of either Gallery images (user taken), Live  
wallpapers (animated backgrounds), or Wallpaper gallery (default  
phone wallpapers).  
Note: Selecting animated Live wallpapers will require additional battery  
power.  
To change the current wallpaper:  
1. Press  
to go to the Home screen.  
2. Touch and hold an empty area of the screen.  
3. From the Add to Home screen window tap Wallpapers  
4. Select a Wallpaper:  
.
Tap Gallery to select from a user image stored in the camera image  
gallery, crop the image, and tap Save  
.
Tap Live wallpapers to select from a list of animated backgrounds,  
once done tap Set wallpaper  
.
Tap Wallpaper gallery, scroll through the images, tap a wallpaper  
image, then tap Set wallpaper  
.
Understanding Your Phone  
48  
   
Section 3: Memory Card  
Your device lets you use a microSD(SD) or microSDHCcard  
(also referred to as a memory card) to expand available memory  
space. This secure digital card enables you to exchange images,  
music, and data between SD-compatible devices. This section  
addresses the features and options of your device’s SD  
functionality. The device has a USB SD card mode.  
SD card Overview  
After mounting an SD card in the device you can use your  
computer to access and manage the SD card.  
Important!: If access to the external SD card is not available, download and  
install the USB drivers.  
microSD card storage: up to 2GB in size  
SDHC card storage: up to 32GB in size  
microSD Icon Indicators  
The following icons show your microSD card connection status at  
a glance:  
Using the SD Card  
There are several methods for using the SD card:  
1. Connecting to your PC to store files (such as music, videos,  
or other types of files and media).  
the card has been unmounted (released from  
use) from the device.  
2. To activate the camera, video, music player, and other  
the card is being prepared for use and for  
mounting.  
dependant media or applications.  
Important!: The Camera, Audio Postcard, Music Player, and Video  
functionality is all dependant on a mounted SD card. Your device  
can support SDHC cards up to 32GB capacity.  
the card has been improperly removed.  
49  
         
5. Touch Connect storage to PC OK. Both the phone and  
computer display icons to show that the device is  
mounted. As soon as the connection is established a drive  
letter is assigned to the phone’s storage device.  
Important!: DO NOT remove a microSD card while the device is accessing or  
transferring files. Doing so will result in loss or damage of data.  
Make sure your battery is fully charged before using the microSD  
card. Your data may become damaged or lost if the battery runs  
out while you are using the microSD card.  
6. Later, tap Disconnect storage from PC to close the USB  
Mounting the SD Card  
connection between the phone and your computer.  
To store photos, music, videos, and other applications. You must  
mount (install) the SD card prior to use. Mounting the SD card  
establishes a USB connection with your computer.  
Unmounting the SD card  
Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to the  
SD card while removing it from the slot.  
Important!: You must enable USB storage to mount the SD card.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
To mount the SD card:  
SD card and phone storage.  
1. Insert the SD card into the external, SD card slot (For more  
2. Tap Unmount SD card OK.  
3. When the “SD card will be unmounted” message displays  
and the Mount SD card now appears in the menu list, open  
the phone and remove the SD card. For more information,  
2. Press and hold  
to turn on the phone.  
3. Connect the USB cable to the phone and connect the cable  
to the computer.  
4. Tap Mass storage. The “USB connected” screen is  
displayed.  
Memory Card  
50  
         
SD card Memory Status  
Factory Data Reset  
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:  
From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings to  
the factory default settings.  
Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
1. Press  
Privacy  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
SD card and phone storage. The available memory  
displays under the Total space and Available space  
headings.  
.
2. Tap Factory data reset. This action erases all data from  
your phone except current system software and bundled  
applications, or SD card files such as music or photos.  
Erasing Files from the SD card  
You can erase files from the SD card using the phone.  
1. Ensure the SD card is mounted. For more information,  
refer to “Unmounting the SD card” on page 50.  
Note: You also have the option to format the phone’s microSD Storage.  
3. Tap Format USB storage to erase all data stored on the  
2. Press  
SD card and phone storage Unmount SD card  
3. Tap Format SD card Format SD card Erase everything  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
device’s internal storage area.  
OK.  
4. Tap Reset phone  
Erase everything.  
to format the SD card. The SD card formats and erases all  
the data stored on it.  
51  
   
Section 4: Call Functions and Contacts List  
This section describes features and functionality associated with  
making or answering calls, and the Contacts list, which is used to  
store contact information.  
Note: When you activate the Auto redial option in the Call settings menu, the  
phone automatically redials up to 10 times when the person does not  
answer the call or is already on the phone, provided your call is not  
sent to voice mail.  
Displaying Your Phone Number  
Press  
About phone  
Phone number field.  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Ending a Call  
Status. Your phone number displays in the  
Briefly tap  
key to end the call.  
Note: To redial a recent number, tap  
list, and tap Call  
, tap a number from the Call logs  
.
Note: The phone’s Settings menu can also be activated by pressing  
and  
then tapping  
(Settings).  
If you exit the current call screen and return to the Home screen,  
You are visually notified that you are still on an active call by the  
green bar within the Status bar.  
Making a Call  
You can store phone numbers that are regularly used to the SIM  
card or to the phone’s memory. These entries are referred to as  
the Contacts list.  
In Call Notification  
1. Press  
2. Enter the phone number to dial then press  
If you make a mistake while dialing, touch  
and then tap  
.
Call  
.
to clear  
the last digit. Touch and hold  
sequence.  
to clear the entire  
Call Functions and Contacts List  
52  
                   
Ending a Call from the Status Bar  
Dialing Options  
1. Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then  
drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the  
Notifications panel (1).  
When you enter numbers on the  
Keypad, you will see three on-  
screen options.  
From the keypad screen, use  
one of the following options:  
2. Tap End to close the currently active call (2).  
Call  
number.  
Delete  
(
Call ) to call the entered  
(
) to delete digits  
from the current number.  
Voice Dialer ) to launch  
the voice recognition application.  
Voice Mail ) to access  
your Voice Mail service.  
To view additional dialing  
options, tap  
(
(
:
Add to Contacts to add the current number to either a new or existing  
Contacts entry.  
Speed dial setting to access the Speed Dialing menu where you can  
assign a speed dial location to a current Contacts entry.  
Send message to send the current caller a text message while still  
maintaining the current call active.  
53  
   
Add 2 sec pause to insert a two-second pause to enter a  
2-second delay within a number string (the phone continues dialing  
after 2 seconds without any additional keys being pressed).  
Add wait to insert a hard pause within the number string (the phone  
waits for your input). A wait requires that any consecutive numbers be  
Touch and drag  
upward to reject  
with a message  
manually sent by tapping Yes  
.
Touch and slide  
right to answer  
the call  
Answering a Call  
When somebody calls you, the phone rings and displays the  
incoming call image.  
Touch and slide  
left to reject  
the call  
The caller's phone number, picture, or name if stored in Contacts  
List, displays.  
At the incoming call screen:  
Prefix Dialing  
Touch and slide  
Touch and slide  
to the right to answer the call.  
to the left to reject the call.  
When activated, this feature automatically prepends a string of  
numbers (such as an area code) to any dialed number. This  
feature is useful for international dialing, or dialing within an area  
code where all the calls you make for a period of time use one  
prefix.  
Touch and drag the Reject call with message tab upward and  
touch a predefined rejection message.  
Pressing the Volume down button mutes the ringer.  
1. From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
Prefix dialing.  
If the incoming call is from a number stored in your Contacts, the  
entry’s name is displayed. You may also see the caller’s phone  
number, if available.  
(
Settings) Call settings All calls  
2. Tap the Enable prefix dialling field. A check mark indicates  
the Prefix dialling feature is active.  
Call Functions and Contacts List  
54  
         
To add a prefix:  
3. Tap selected prefixes to remove from them from the list.  
1. From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
– or –  
(Settings) Call settings  
All calls Prefix dialing  
Tap Select all  
.
Enable prefix dialling  
.
4. Tap Delete  
.
2. Tap Prefix dialling list  
Create. The list is empty until you  
Using the Voice Dialer  
add a prefix.  
Voice dialer is a voice recognition software used to activate a wide  
variety of functions on your phone.  
3. Enter a prefix number using the keypad and tap Save. The  
prefix displays in the Prefix dialing list.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Voice Dialer).  
(Applications) ➔  
4. Tap the white circle icon beside the prefix. A green icon  
(
indicates the selection of a prefix.  
2. When the Voice Dialer displays the “Listening” prompt, say  
5. Each time you dial a number, the activated prefix is  
one of the following commands:  
automatically added to the dialed number.  
“Call John Doe”  
“Call John Doe at home,...”  
“Call vicennial”  
6. Tap another prefix in the Prefix dialing list to change  
prefixes.  
“Dial (866) 555 0123”  
“Dial 911, 811,...”  
“Dial +44 7333 444 555”  
“Redial”  
To delete a prefix:  
1. From the Home screen, press  
Call settings All calls Prefix dialing  
list  
2. Press  
and then tap  
Prefix dialling  
.
“Open Calendar”  
and then tap Delete  
.
55  
         
3. A menu prompts you to confirm your selection.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and use the on-screen  
keypad to enter the phone number.  
If you said a name with more than one match in Contacts,  
or if you stored more than one number for the contact, you  
are prompted to select from multiple options.  
2. Press  
and then tap Add 2 sec pause. This feature  
adds an automatic two-second pause.  
3. Use the keypad to enter the additional numbers that will be  
International Calls  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
dialed automatically after the second pause.  
, then touch and hold  
. The + symbol displays.  
Tip: You can create pauses longer than two seconds by entering multiple  
2-sec pauses.  
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the country code, area  
code, and phone number.  
4. Tap  
.
Call  
If you make a mistake, tap  
once to delete a single digit.  
Touch and hold to delete all digits.  
3. Tap  
.
Call  
Pause Dialing  
You can dial or save phone numbers with pauses for use with  
automated systems, such as voicemail or financial phone  
numbers.  
2-Second Pause automatically sends the next set of numbers after  
a two-second pause. This is indicated in the number string as a  
comma (  
,).  
Wait sends the next set of numbers only after tapping  
. This is  
Send  
indicated in the number string as a semicolon (;).  
Call Functions and Contacts List  
56  
         
Wait Dialing  
Redialing the Last Number  
Inserting a Wait into your dialing  
sequence means that the phone  
waits until it hears a dial tone  
before proceeding with the next  
sequence of numbers.  
The phone stores the numbers of the calls you’ve dialed,  
received, or missed if the caller is identified.  
To recall any of these numbers:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
2. Tap the Call logs tab to display the list of recent calls.  
1. From the Home screen,  
Call  
3. Tap the name/number and tap  
.
tap  
and use the  
– or –  
on-screen keypad to  
enter the phone number.  
Tap  
to the right of the name/number.  
2. Press  
and then tap  
Add wait. This feature  
causes the phone to  
Speed Dialing  
Once you have stored phone numbers from your Contacts List,  
you can set up to 8 speed dial entries and then dial them easily  
whenever you want, simply by touching the associated numeric  
key.  
require your acceptance  
before sending the next set of entered digits.  
Call  
3. Tap  
.
4. Once prompted, tap  
to dial the remaining digits.  
Send  
57  
         
Setting Up Speed Dial Entries  
Changing a Speed Dial Entry  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
Important!: Speed dial location #1 is reserved for Voicemail. No other  
number can be assigned to this slot.  
2. Press  
and then tap Speed dial setting.  
1. From the Home screen,  
Important!: The number 1 is reserved for Voicemail and another number  
cannot be assigned to this slot.  
tap  
.
2. Press  
and then tap  
3. Press  
and then tap Change order.  
Speed dial setting. The  
Speed dial screen  
displays a virtual keypad  
with the numbers 1  
through 9.  
4. In a single motion, touch and drag an entry over another  
location on the virtual keypad.  
5. Tap Save to store the new assignment.  
6. Press  
to return to the previous screen.  
Removing a Speed Dial Entry  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
3. Tap an unassigned  
number. The Contacts  
screen displays.  
.
2. Press  
and then tap Speed dial setting.  
4. Tap a contact and select  
3. Touch and hold an on-screen speed dial location and  
select Remove from the context menu.  
– or –  
a number to assign to the speed dial location. The selected  
contact number/image is displayed in the speed dial  
number box.  
Press  
and then tap Remove. Tap an entry and select  
Remove  
.
Call Functions and Contacts List  
58  
     
4. Press  
to return to the previous screen.  
Important!: Wi-Fi must first be active and communicating prior to launching  
Wi-Fi Calling.  
Making a Call Using Speed Dial  
You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in the  
Contacts List for speed dialing.  
Activating Wi-Fi  
1. Press  
network  
and then tap  
Wireless and  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
Wi-Fi settings.  
2. Touch and hold a speed dial location (numbers 2-9, or 1 if  
2. Tap Wi-Fi to turn it on. A checkmark displays to indicate  
you are dialing voice mail) until the number begins to dial.  
activation.  
3. If you are not certain of the speed dial location, tap  
3. Tap an available WAP (Wireless Access Point) from within  
the Wi-Fi networks area of the page. Follow the on-screen  
instructions to complete connection.  
Speed dial setting and tap a speed dial  
number to view the assigned phone number.  
Wi-Fi Calling  
Note: To avoid international data roaming fees when using Wi-Fi calling  
when outside the United States, the Data Roaming feature on your  
device must be turned off.  
Wi-Fi Calling is a free feature for T-Mobile customers with a Wi-Fi  
capable phone. Wi-Fi Calling is an excellent solution for coverage  
issues in and around the home or wherever cellular coverage is  
limited. Minutes used while connected to the Wi-Fi network  
count against available rate plan minutes.  
Note: With certain rate plans, minutes used while connected to the Wi-Fi  
network count against available rate plan minutes.  
The benefits of Wi-Fi Calling include the following:  
Wi-Fi Calling provides a coverage option to improve upon your current  
in-home coverage experience  
Wi-Fi Calling works anywhere there is an open Wi-Fi signal available  
59  
       
Launching Wi-Fi Calling  
3. If prompted, tap Register to communicate with the network  
and register your phone for this service.  
Note: Verify you are currently connected to a Wireless Access Point.  
4. If not already  
activated, tap the  
slider to activate  
Wi-Fi Calling. The  
1. Ensure that the Wi-Fi connected icon displays on the  
status bar. The network names and security settings (Open  
network or Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi networks  
display in the Wi-Fi networks section.  
slider shows On  
.
Your device  
connects to the  
T-Mobile  
Note: When you select an open network you are automatically connected.  
Wi-Fi Calling  
activation  
slider  
Wi-Fi Connected  
Network.  
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and  
communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP).  
5. If prompted, tap  
Confirm to  
Wi-Fi Communication Issue  
register the service on the network (for first time users).  
Displays when Wi-Fi is active and there is an available  
open wireless network.  
Important!: Wi-Fi calling using plan minutes.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
(Wi-Fi Calling).  
Call Functions and Contacts List  
60  
In Call Options  
When Action  
Then  
Your phone provides a number of features that are available for  
use during a call.  
Displays on the You are connected to the  
screen status  
bar.  
T-Mobile network and can  
make Wi-Fi calls.  
Displays on the The feature is active and you  
screen status  
bar.  
are using with within your  
current active call.  
Speakerphone  
indicator  
Does not display You are charged normal calling  
on the screen  
status bar.  
Place a call  
Dials the  
on hold  
number  
Adds a  
Ends the  
new call  
call  
6. Use the phone Dialer, call log, or contacts list to make a  
Activates or  
Deactivates  
Bluetooth  
Headset  
Activates  
speakerphone  
call.  
7. Confirm you established a Wi-Fi calling connection to the  
Mutes or Unmutes  
the current call  
T-Mobile network by making sure  
appears at the top  
of the screen and  
appears during the call.  
8. Go to the dialer and make a call.  
61  
   
Adjusting the Call Volume  
To make a new call while a call is in progress:  
1. Enter the new phone number that you wish to dial or look it  
up in Call history.  
During a call, use the Volume keys on the left side of the phone,  
to adjust the earpiece volume.  
Press the Up volume key to increase the volume level and  
the Down volume key to decrease the level.  
– or –  
2. Tap Add call to dial the second call.  
3. Dial the new phone number and tap  
.
Call  
To switch between the two calls:  
From the screen during a call, press the Up Volume key.  
Tap Swap.  
From the Home screen, you can also adjust the ring volume using  
these keys.  
The In call number turns gray and displays On hold. The  
active call displays a green background behind the  
number.  
Placing a Call on Hold  
You can place the current call on hold whenever you want. If your  
network supports this service, you can also make another call  
while a call is in progress.  
Turning the Speakerphone on and off  
While on a call, you can use your Speakerphone by following  
these steps:  
To place a call on hold:  
Speaker  
1. Tap  
(Speaker off) to turn the speakerphone on.  
1. Tap Hold to place the current call on hold.  
Speaker  
2. Tap  
(Speaker on) to turn the speakerphone off.  
2. Tap Unhold to activate the call that is on hold.  
Tip: When the speaker is turned On, the color of the speaker is green. When  
the speaker is turned Off, the color of the speaker is gray.  
Call Functions and Contacts List  
62  
     
Creating a Memo During a Call  
Muting a Call  
1. Tap  
Mute  
(Mute off) to turn mute on so the other caller  
During a call it may be necessary to record information (a Note).  
cannot hear you speaking.  
1. Press  
and then tap Memo.  
Mute  
2. Tap  
(Mute on) to turn mute off and resume your  
2. Use the keyboard to enter the note then tap Save  
.
conversation.  
If desired, while creating your new memo, press  
new memo background color before saving.  
and select a  
Switching to Bluetooth Headset  
1. While on a call, switch to the Bluetooth headset instead of  
Automatic screen lock  
If you configured your phone with the Automatic screen lock  
option, during a call your screen locks to prevent accidental  
screen presses. To temporarily unlock the screen press the lock  
key (on the right side of the phone).  
speaker by tapping Headset  
.
2. At the prompt, tap Yes to enable Bluetooth if it is not  
already activated.  
Multi-Party calls  
Making a Multi-Party Call  
More In-call Options  
During a call you can save the current caller’s information to the  
Contacts list, or create a Memo.  
A multi-party call is a network service that allows up to six  
people to participate in a multi-party or conference call.  
Viewing the Contacts List  
For further details about subscribing to this service, contact  
T-Mobile customer service.  
During a call you can look up a number in the Contacts list.  
1. Press  
2. Browse the Contacts list for the information you need.  
3. Press to return to the active call.  
and then tap Contacts.  
63  
             
Setting up a Multi-Party Call  
Having a Private Conversation With One Participant  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
When you have two participants  
Manage Conference Call  
in a multi-party session, you  
might be necessary to place  
one of those participants on  
hold so that a private  
2. Dial the number for the first participant and tap  
.
Call  
3. Tap Add call, enter the second phone number and  
tap  
. The first caller is placed on hold.  
Call  
conversation can be held with a  
single caller. While you are in a  
multi-party call:  
4. Wait for the second caller to answer the incoming call and  
tap Join. The two calls are now joined into a multi-party  
call and display in the order in which they were called.  
Important!: A maximum of two callers can be joined to a single multi-party  
line. Additional callers participate in a new Multiparty session  
and held in conjunction with the previous multiparty call. You can  
swap or place each multi-party call on hold.  
Call Functions and Contacts List  
64  
     
1. Press  
and then tap Manage Conference Call  
.
4. To return to the multi-party call, tap the Join icon. All of the  
multi-party call participants can now hear each other.  
– or –  
Tap the Manage Conference Call image shown on page 64.  
Dropping One Participant  
1. Press  
and then tap Manage Conference Call.  
2. Tap  
adjacent to the participants you would like to  
split from the current call. The list displays the callers in  
the order they were dialed.  
– or –  
Tap the Manage Conference Call image shown on page 64.  
2. Tap End to the right of the number to drop.  
The participant is disconnected and you can continue the  
call with the other participant.  
Split  
Caller  
End  
Call  
3. Tap  
to end the current call.  
Call Waiting  
You can answer an incoming call while you have a call in  
progress, if this service is supported by the network and you  
must have previously set the Call waiting option to Activate.  
Return  
to Call  
You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting tone. For  
3. Tap the number for the participant in which you want to  
speak privately. You can now talk privately to that person  
while the other participants can continue to converse with  
each other. If there is only one other participant, that  
person is placed on hold.  
65  
   
To answer a new call while you have a call in progress:  
Displays when a call was missed.  
1. In a single motion, touch  
and slide it to the right to  
answer the new incoming call.  
Accessing the Call Logs Tab  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Note: The new caller appears at the top of the list. The previous caller is  
Call logs tab.  
placed on hold and appears at the bottom of the list.  
2. Tap an entry to view available options.  
2. Tap Swap to switch between the two calls. This places the  
new caller on hold and activates the previous call. The  
active call displays with a green background.  
Note: The Call logs tab only records calls that occur while the phone is turned  
on. If a call is received while it is turned off, it will not be included in  
your calling history.  
3. Tap Swap again to switch back.  
Each entry contains the phone number (if it is available) and  
Contacts entry name (if the number is in your Contacts).  
Call Logs Tab  
The Call logs tab is a list of the phone numbers (or Contacts  
entries) for calls you placed, accepted, or missed. The Call logs  
tab make redialing a number fast and easy. It is continually  
updated as your device automatically adds new numbers to the  
beginning of the list and removes the oldest entries from the  
bottom of the list.  
Indicates all outgoing calls made from your device.  
Indicates any received calls that were answered.  
Indicates a missed call.  
The Notification area of the Home screen (upper-left) displays  
phone notifications, status, or alerts such as:  
Displays when a call is in progress.  
Call Functions and Contacts List  
66  
       
Accessing Call Logs from The Notifications Area  
Call Logs - Caller Overview  
1. Locate  
from the Notifications area of the Status bar.  
Call options (tap)  
2. Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then  
drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the  
Notifications panel (1).  
Call Log screen  
3. Tap the Missed call entry to open the Logs screen (2).  
Entry-specific  
context menu  
Tip: Press  
and tap Notifications to open the panel.  
(touch and hold)  
This list provides easy access to redial an entry, or you can also  
choose to access two types of history entry lists depending on  
how they are touched.  
67  
 
Tap a contact entry name or number to reveal the call options screen:  
• Add to reject list to add the current phone number to an automatic  
rejection list. Similar to a block list, the selected caller will be  
blocked from making an incoming calls to your phone.  
• Call allows you to redial the entry by name or number.  
• Send message allows you to create a new text message to the  
selected entry.  
• Delete to delete the entry from the Logs list.  
Altering Numbers from the Call Log  
• Send email allows you to create a new email that is then  
addressed to the entry’s available email address.  
If you need to make a call from the Call logs screen and you need  
to alter the number prior to dialing, you can add the appropriate  
prefix by prepending the number.  
• Time provides the time and date of the call and its duration.  
• Add to Contacts to save the number if it is not already in your  
Contacts.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Call logs tab.  
Touch and hold an entry to display the entry-specific context menu:  
2. Touch and hold an entry to access the entry-specific  
• Call [Number] to redial the current phone number.  
context menu.  
• Send message allows you to create a new text message to the  
selected entry.  
3. Tap Edit number before call  
4. Edit the number using the on-screen dialpad or delete  
digits by pressing to erase the numbers.  
.
• Edit number before call to make alterations to the current phone  
number prior to redial.  
• Add to Contacts to save the number if it is not already in your  
Contacts.  
5. Tap  
once the number has been changed.  
Call  
• View contact to view the information for the currently stored  
Contacts entry.  
• Send contact information to send the Log entry information via  
text message.  
Call Functions and Contacts List  
68  
     
Erasing the Call Log  
Viewing Missed Calls from Lock Screen  
You can delete either an individual call log entry or all current  
entries from the Call logs list.  
When you are unable to answer  
a call for any reason and your  
screen is locked, the number of  
missed calls are displayed on  
the Lock screen immediately  
after a call is missed.  
To clear a single entry from the list:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Call logs tab.  
2. Touch and hold an entry and select Delete  
.
To view a missed call  
immediately:  
To clear all entries from the list:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press Delete.  
3. Tap Select all Delete OK.  
Call logs tab.  
1. Press  
the screen.  
to reactive  
2. Touch and drag the  
puzzle piece (with the  
number of missed calls  
on it) to the area where  
the piece is missing.  
The Call logs tab is then displayed.  
69  
     
Section 5: Entering Text  
Thissectiondescribeshowtoselectthedesiredtextinputmethod  
Selecting the Text Input Method  
when entering characters into your phone. This section also  
describes the predictive text entry system that reduces the  
amount of key strokes associated with entering text.  
The Text Input Method can be assigned from within one of two  
locations:  
Settings Menu:  
Your phone comes equipped with an orientation detector that can  
tell if the phone is being held in an upright (Portrait) or sideways  
(Landscape) orientation. This is useful when entering text.  
Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) Locale  
and text  
Select input method  
.
Text Input field:  
Your phone also provides several on-screen keypad text entry  
options to make the task of text entry that much easier.  
1. From a screen where you can enter text, touch and hold  
the text input field to open the context-menu.  
Text Input Methods  
2. Select the desired input method (Samsung keypad or  
There are two text input methods available:  
Swype).  
Samsung Keypad: an on-screen QWERTY keypad that can be  
used in both portrait and landscape orientation.  
Swype (default): a new way to enter text on touch screens.  
Instead of tapping each key, use your finger to trace over each  
letter of a word.  
The on-screen QWERTY keypad works the same in both portrait  
and landscape mode.  
Default Text  
Input Method  
Entering Text  
70  
             
SWYPE Settings  
Using the Swype Keyboard  
Swype™ is the default text input method that allows you to enter  
a word by sliding your finger or stylus from letter to letter, lifting  
your finger between words. SWYPE uses error correcting  
algorithms and a language model to predict the next word.  
SWYPE also includes a touch predictive text system.  
To configure Swype settings:  
1. Press  
Swype  
and then tap  
Locale and text  
.
2. Locate the Preferences section to alter these settings:  
• Language: allows you to select the current text input language.  
Enabling and Configuring SWYPE  
Default language is US English.  
If you configure another text input method (Samsung keypad) you  
must re-enable SWYPE before using the SWYPE keyboard.  
• Audio feedback: turns on sounds generated by the Swype  
application.  
When SWYPE is enabled there is no normal keyboard  
functionality.  
• Vibrate on keypress: activates a vibration sensation as you enter  
text using the keypad.  
1. Press  
and text  
2. Tap Select input method  
and then tap  
(Settings) Locale  
• Show tips: turns on a flashing indicator for quick help.  
3. Locate the Swype Advanced Settings section to alter these  
settings:  
.
Swype.  
• Word suggestion: predicts words as you are typing.  
• Auto-spacing: automatically inserts a space between words.  
When you finish a word, just lift your finger or stylus and start the  
next word.  
• Auto-capitalization: automatically capitalizes the first letter of a  
sentence.  
• Show complete trace: selects whether to display the complete  
Swype path.  
71  
           
• Speed vs. accuracy: sets how quickly Swype responds to  
Double-touch on the word you want to change to correct a misspelled  
word, then touch the delete key to erase one character. Touch and hold  
the delete key to erase an entire word.  
on-screen input. Move the slider between Fast Response (speed)  
or Error Tolerannce (accuracy) and tap OK  
.
• Personal dictionary: helps you manage your personal Swype  
Selecting a Text Input Mode in Swype  
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input  
field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.  
dictionary.  
• Reset Swype’s dictionary: deletes all previous words you have  
added to Swype’s dictionary.  
4. Locate the Help section to alter these settings:  
2. With Swype as your text entry method, select one of the  
following text mode options:  
• Swype help: allows you to view the on-line user manual for Swype.  
Tutorial: a short tutorial that helps you to get started using Swype.  
5. Locate the About section to review the Swype application  
information:  
• 123ABC Mode: activates the default alphabetic keys. Press the  
Shift key to toggle between Abc, ABC, or abc. When in this mode,  
123  
SYM  
the input type button shows  
.
• Version: lists the Swype version number.  
• Symbol/Numeric Mode: activates the number, symbol, and  
Swype Text Entry Tips  
emoticon keys. When in this mode, the input type button shows  
123  
You can access the SwypeTips application and watch a video or  
tutorial on using Swype. You can also use the following Swype  
text entry tips.  
ABC  
Note: When in Abc mode, the Sym key displays. When in Sym mode, the ABC  
key displays.  
Create a squiggle (like an S shape) to create a double letter (such as  
pp in apple).  
Touch and hold a key to view the punctuation menu then make a  
selection.  
Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the  
key changes to  
and all letters that follow are in lower case.  
Move your finger or stylus over the apostrophe to enter contractions.  
Entering Text  
72  
     
Swype Keyboard Overview  
Note: If multiple word choices exist for your Swype entry, an on-screen  
Recipients: a field where you can enter the recipients of the current  
message. You can choose from Recent, Contacts, or Group.  
Text Input field: a field where text, number, or other characters can be  
entered.  
popup appears to provide additional word choices.  
CAPS/ALT key: When in 123ABC mode, this key changes the  
capitalization of the subsequent entered characters. When in SYM  
mode, this key can show additional symbol characters.  
Text Input mode: There are two available modes: 123ABC and  
Recipients  
Text input field  
123SYM  
.
Word  
suggestions  
123ABC mode contains alphanumeric characters and a few common  
punctuation marks. Text mode button indicates 123SYM  
SYM mode contains only symbols and numbers. Text mode button  
indicates 123ABC  
.
Current Mode  
.
SWYPE tips: Tapping this button displays the Swype tips and tutorial  
screen.  
CAPS/ALT  
key  
To enter text via Swype:  
Delete  
For example, if you were going to enter the word “guys”. Put your  
finger down on the “g”, and without lifting, glide it to the “u”, and  
then to the “y”, and then over to the “s”. When complete, lift your  
finger off the screen to allow the device to determine the closest  
word match.  
SWYPE Tips  
Text Input mode  
Voice actions  
73  
Using Abc Mode in Swype  
Initial Uppercase  
1. From within an active text entry screen, rotate the phone  
counterclockwise to a landscape orientation, if desired.  
The following screen displays:  
Displays when the initial character is entered as  
uppercase but all subsequent characters are  
lowercase.  
123  
ABC  
All Uppercase  
2. Tap  
to configure the keyboard for ABC mode. Once  
123  
Displays when all characters will be entered as  
uppercase characters.  
in this mode, the text input type shows  
.
SYM  
Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the  
key changes to  
and all letters that follow are in lower case.  
By default, the first letter of an entry is capitalized and the  
following letters are lower case. After a word is entered and you  
lift your finger, the cursor automatically adds a space after the  
word.  
3. Swipe your finger continuously over the letters to form a  
word.  
If you make a mistake, tap  
to erase a single character.  
Touch and hold to erase an entire word.  
4. Tap Send to deliver the message.  
All lowercase  
Displays when the next character is entered in  
lowercase.  
Entering Text  
74  
Entering Numbers and Symbols in Swype  
Using the Samsung QWERTY Keypad  
By using the onscreen keyboard in portrait mode, some symbols  
are not available (such as Emoticons or Smileys). In SYM mode  
using Swype, you can only enter symbols and numbers from the  
onscreen keyboard. Once in SYM mode, the text mode key shows  
This QWERTY keypad can be used to enter text in either a Portrait  
or landscape orientation. The only difference between the two  
orientations are the sizes of the keys.  
From a screen where you enter text, rotate your phone  
counterclockwise to a landscape orientation. The on-screen  
QWERTY keypad displays.  
123  
.
ABC  
1. 1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text  
input field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.  
123  
SYM  
2. Tap  
to configure the keyboard for SYM mode. Once  
123  
in this mode, the text input type shows  
.
ABC  
3. Tap the on-screen key for the number or symbol you want  
to enter.  
4. Touch and hold an on-screen key to enter the secondary  
symbol (above the main one on the same key).  
5. Tap  
to choose from additional symbols.  
For example:  
To enter  
&
: tap 123SYM and select the  
&
key.  
To enter  
- or -  
~
tap 123SYM and draw a circle over the key.  
&
To enter  
~
tap 123SYM  
&
key.  
75  
 
The Samsung Keypad  
– or –  
This device has a built-in, QWERTY keypad (portrait mode) or  
keyboard (landscape mode). Using the QWERTY keypad/  
keyboard, you can type letter, numbers, punctuation, and other  
characters.  
From a screen where you can enter text, tap and hold the  
text input field and tap Input method  
Samsung keypad.  
2. The virtual keyboard is then assigned to the Samsung  
keypad configuration for all subsequent text input.  
To use the Samsung keypad you must first configure the settings  
to default to the Samsung keypad.  
Text input field  
Suggested Words  
1. Press  
and text  
and then tap  
(
Settings) Locale  
Select input method  
Samsung keypad  
.
Shift key Input Mode  
Indicator  
Current Mode  
Settings Emoticons  
Entering Text  
76  
 
Changing the QWERTY Input Type  
Initial Uppercase  
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input  
field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.  
Displays when the initial character is entered as  
uppercase but all subsequent characters are  
lowercase.  
2. With Samsung keypad as your text entry method, select  
All Uppercase  
one of the following text mode options:  
Displays when all characters will be entered as  
uppercase characters.  
• Abc Mode  
to use alphabetic characters from the  
ABC  
on-screen keyboard. In this mode, the text mode button displays  
?123  
. Tap the Shift key to toggle between Abc, ABC, or abc.  
By default, the first letter of a new entry is capitalized and the  
following letters are lowercased. After a character is entered, the  
cursor automatically advances to the next space.  
?123  
• Symbol/Numeric Mode  
: to enter numbers by pressing the  
numbers selecting them on the onscreen keyboard. In this mode,  
the text mode button displays  
.
ABC  
Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, tap  
to toggle the  
capitalization.  
All lowercase  
Displays when the next character is entered in  
lowercase.  
77  
 
Using Abc Mode  
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode  
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input  
field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.  
Use the Symbol/Numeric Mode to add numbers, symbols, or  
emoticons. While in this mode, the text mode key displays  
.
ABC  
2. Tap  
to configure the keyboard for ABC mode. Once  
ABC  
?123  
in this mode, the text input type shows  
.
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input  
field to reveal the on-screen keyboard. Rotate the phone  
counterclockwise to a landscape orientation, if desired.  
Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the  
key changes to  
and all letters that follow are in lower case.  
?123  
2. Tap  
to configure the keyboard for Symbol  
3. Enter your text using the on-screen keyboard.  
If you make a mistake, tap to erase a single character.  
Touch and hold to erase an entire word.  
4. Tap Send to deliver the message.  
mode.Once in this mode, the text input type shows  
The following screen displays:  
.
ABC  
3. Tap a number, symbol, or emoticon character.  
Entering Text  
78  
4. Tap  
to return to ABC mode.  
2. Tap the XT9 field. A checkmark indicates activation.  
ABC  
To enter symbols:  
?123  
3. Tap the XT9 advanced settings and configure any of the  
following advanced options:  
5. Tap  
to configure the keyboard for Symbol mode.  
• Word completion tells your device to attempt to predict how to  
complete the word you have started. (A green check mark indicates  
the feature is enabled.)  
6. Tap the appropriate symbol key.  
– or –  
1/3  
Tap  
button to cycle through additional pages.  
• Word completion point sets how many letters should be entered  
before a word prediction is made. Choose from 2 letters, 3 letters,  
4 letters, or 5 letters.  
The first number on this key indicates which page (1, 2, or 3) of  
additional characters is active.  
• Spell correction enables the automatic correction of typographical  
errors by selecting from a list of possible words that reflect both the  
characters of the keys you touched, and those of nearby  
Using XT9 Predictive Text  
XT9 is a predictive text system that has next-letter prediction and  
regional error correction, which compensates for users pressing  
the wrong keys on QWERTY keyboards.  
characters. (A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled.)  
• Next word prediction predicts the next word you are like to enter.  
(A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled.)  
• Auto-append automatically adds predictions to the word you are  
typing. (A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled.)  
Note: XT9 is only available when ABC mode is selected. XT9 advanced  
settings are available only if the XT9 field has been selected.  
• Auto-substitution allows the device to automatically replace  
misspelled or miskeyed words. This option reduce “typos.” (A green  
check mark indicates the feature is enabled.)  
1. Press  
and then tap  
Locale and text  
Samsung keypad.  
• Regional correction automatically tries to correct errors caused  
when you tap keys adjacent to the correct keys. (A green check  
mark indicates the feature is enabled.  
– or –  
From within an active text entry screen, tap  
at the  
bottom of the screen to access the Samsung keypad  
• Recapture sets the device to redisplay the word suggestion list  
after selecting the wrong word from the list.  
settings screen.  
79  
   
• XT9 my words allows you to add new words to the built-in XT9  
dictionary.  
Tap Add word.  
Use the Register to XT9 my words field to enter the new word.  
Tap Done to store the new word.  
• XT9 auto-substitution allows you create a word rule by adding  
words for automatic substitution during text entry (for example  
youve becomes you’ve).  
Tap the XT9 auto-substitution field. Flick up or down to review the  
current list of word substitutions.  
Press  
and tap Add.  
Enter the original word that will be replaced in the Shortcut field (for  
example, youve).  
Enter the substitute word that will be used in the Substitution field (for  
example, you?fve).  
Tap Done to save the substitution rule.  
4. Press  
to return to the previous screen.  
Entering Text  
80  
Section 6: Contacts  
This section explains how to use and manage your Contacts List.  
You can save phone numbers to your phone’s memory.  
4. From the Manage  
accounts area, tap  
next to the account you  
want to synchronize.  
– or –  
Accounts  
From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications to  
synchronize, send, and receive data at any given time, or if you  
want the applications to synchronize automatically. After  
determining how you want the accounts to synchronize, indicate  
which account to synchronize with your Contacts list.  
Tap Add account to create  
a new account.  
1. Sign in to your Google account.  
5. Tap an account type to  
2. Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
add.  
Accounts and sync  
.
6. Follow the on-screen  
instructions. The selected  
account type  
– or –  
From the Home screen, press  
Settings Accounts and sync  
and then tap  
.
synchronizes with your Contacts list.  
3. From the General sync settings section, touch one of the  
following options:  
• Background data: allows your phone to use data in the  
background.  
• Auto-sync: automatically synchronizes your data with the phone.  
81  
   
Contacts List  
Creating a Contact  
Note: If the phone is ever reset to its factory default parameters, contacts  
stored on the phone can be lost.  
The default storage location for  
saving phone numbers to your  
Contacts List is your phone’s  
built-in memory.  
SIM contacts are stored within the SIM Card.  
Note: SIM contacts only store the Name and Phone number for an entry.  
T-Mobile Contacts Backup contacts are stored remotely on the  
T-Mobile servers and can later be retrieved even if your phone has  
been damaged or reset.  
If existing Google and Corporate  
email accounts have been  
synchronized to your phone,  
these will be made available to  
your device during the creation  
of new entries. These new  
Contacts entries can be  
assigned or saved to synced  
accounts such as Phone, SIM,  
Google, or Corporate.  
Google contacts are shared with your existing Google account and can  
also be imported to your phone after you have created a Google Mail  
account.  
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (also known as Work or Outlook)  
contacts are those contacts that are intended to be shared with either  
®
®
an Exchange Server or from within Microsoft Outlook  
.
Note: When storing an entry into your SIM card, note that only the Name, and  
Number are saved. To save additional information for a particular  
contact, such as notes, email, dates, etc., it is important to save that  
Contact into your phone’s onboard memory.  
Your phone automatically sorts the Contacts entries  
alphabetically. You can create either a Phone  
Contacts Backup Google, or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync  
contact.  
,
SIM, T-Mobile  
,
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap to create a contact.  
(Contacts).  
Note: Before you can save a contact to the Phone, Contact settings must be  
set to Save new contacts to Phone  
.
Phone contacts are stored locally on the device.  
Contacts  
82  
         
7. Tap a phone number field and enter a phone number.  
Note: You can also add a new contact by entering a number from the keypad  
and pressing and then tap Add to Contacts Create  
Tap  
on the QWERTY keyboard to remove a previously  
(
entered phone number.  
contact). Continue with step 3.  
Tap  
to enter an additional phone number  
to remove a previously entered phone number.  
IM Groups,  
Organization or More fields to  
input additional category information.  
3. Tap a destination type (Phone SIM, T-Mobile Contacts  
,
Tap  
backup, Google, or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync  
)
8. Enter additional information such as: Email  
,
,
(depending on where you want to save the new contact  
information).  
Ringtone Postal address  
,
,
4. Tap the First name and Last name fields, and enter a name  
The More field contains the following options: Notes, Nickname,  
Website, Internet call, Birthday, and Anniversary.  
for this contact using the displayed keypad.  
5. Tap the image icon and select a photo for this contact.  
Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields  
and categories.  
Selections are: Album, or Take photo  
6. Tap the label button (to the left of the Phone number field)  
to select a category such as Mobile (default), Home Work  
Work fax Home fax Pager Other Custom, or Callback  
.
9. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.  
To save a Number from your Keypad:  
,
,
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Phone).  
,
,
,
,
.
2. Enter a phone number using the on-screen dialpad.  
Note: These labels entries can change and are dependant on the selected  
destination type (ex: Callback might not appear with a Google account  
destination type).  
83  
   
3. Tap Add to Contacts  
(Create contact) or select the  
Note: For further details about how to enter characters, see “Text Input  
Contact entry from the on-screen list.  
– or –  
Finding a Contact  
Press  
and then tap Add to Contacts  
(Create  
You can store phone numbers and their corresponding names  
onto either your SIM card, your phone’s built-in memory, or an  
external location (such as Google, Exchange, or T-Mobile  
Backup). They are all physically separate but are used as a single  
entity, called Contacts.  
contact) or select the Contact entry from the on-screen list.  
If you're updating an existing contact, tap the entry from the list and  
proceed to step 5.  
4. Tap a destination type (Phone SIM, T-Mobile Contacts  
,
Depending on the storage size of the particular SIM card, the  
maximum number of phone numbers the card can store may  
differ.  
backup, Google, or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync).  
(depending on where you want to save the new contact  
information).  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Contacts).  
5. Tap the First name and Last name fields, and enter a name  
2. Swipe up or down until you see the contact displayed.  
for this contact.  
– or –  
6. Tap the label button (to the left of the Phone number field)  
Tap the Search contacts field and begin entering the entry’s  
name. Matching entries are then displayed. This process  
filters through all of your current account Contact entries to  
only show you the matching entries.  
to select a category such as Mobile (default), Home  
,
Work,  
Work fax Home fax Pager Other Custom, or Callback.  
,
,
,
,
Note: These labels entries can change and are dependant on the selected  
destination type (ex: Callback might not appear with a Google account  
destination type).  
– or –  
7. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.  
Contacts  
84  
 
In a single motion, touch and hold the letter tab area (on  
the right) until on-screen letters appear, then scroll through  
the list. You are then taken to that section of the Contacts  
list. Touch the contact entry.  
Editing Contact Information  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
2. Tap a contact name from the list.  
3. Press  
and select Edit.  
Note: You can also access an entry’s context menu by touching and holding  
an entry then tapping Edit  
.
Tabs  
Search  
Contacts  
field  
4. Edit the contact information then tap Save  
.
Create  
Contact  
Contacts  
Context  
Menu  
Tabbed  
Navigation  
85  
 
Adding a Number to an Existing Contact  
The More field contains the following options: Notes, Nickname,  
Website, Internet call, Birthday, and Anniversary.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields  
and categories.  
2. Touch and hold an entry  
and select Edit to reveal  
the Contact entry’s  
5. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.  
Deleting Contacts  
This option allows you to delete your contacts. You can delete all  
3. Tap a phone number field  
and enter a phone  
number.  
your entries from your phone’s memory, your SIM card, FDN, or  
All.  
Important!: Once Contacts List entries are deleted, they cannot be recovered.  
Tap  
on the  
QWERTY keyboard to  
remove a previously  
entered phone number.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Touch and hold a contact name from the list and select  
Delete OK  
.
.
Tap  
additional phone number  
Tap to remove a  
previously entered phone number.  
4. Enter additional information such as: Email  
Postal address Organization or More fields to input  
additional category information.  
to enter an  
Contact List Options  
Contact Details Screen  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
2. Press  
. The following options display:  
• Create contact: allows you to create a new Contact entry.  
,
IM, Ringtone,  
• Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts.  
,
Contacts  
86  
       
• Display options: You can choose to only display contacts that have  
phone numbers, sort by first or last name, display contacts first  
name first or last name first, display contacts stored to your SIM  
card, display contacts stored on your phone, and/or display  
contacts stored to other accounts.  
Contact Menu Options  
1. From the Home screen,  
tap  
.
2. Touch and hold an entry to  
reveal the context menu.  
The following options  
display:  
• Import/Export: imports or exports contacts to or from the SIM card  
or microSD card.  
• Get friends: allows you to get contacts from your friends on  
Facebook, Twitter, or MySpace. You can also get contacts from  
Corporate or Google accounts.  
• Edit: allows you to edit the  
currently selected Contacts  
entry.  
• More  
:
Accounts: allows you to add and manage mobile accounts on  
Facebook, Twitter, or MySpace. You can also add Corporate or Google  
accounts.  
• Delete: allows you to delete the  
currently selected Contacts  
entry.  
Speed dial: allows you to set up speed-dialing.  
Send email: allows you to send an email using your Google account.  
Send message: allows you to send a text or picture message.  
• Join contact: allows you to link  
the current contact to another current contact. Similar to a “see  
also” feature. If you can’t remember a contact’s information, linking  
entries can help you find the person you are looking for.  
My profile: allows you to set up a profile for yourself. The information  
will be the same that you can add for a new contact.  
• Send contact information: allows you to send the current entry  
info via text message.  
Settings: allows you to configure where you save new contacts, or view  
your Own numbers, or Service numbers.  
• Add to favorites: allows you to copy the current Contacts entry to  
the list within the Favorites tab.  
• Remove from favorites: allows you to remove the current Contacts  
entry from the Favorites tab.  
87  
       
• Add to group: allows you to add the current Contacts entry to an  
existing group.  
Joining Contact Information  
Most people now maintain multiple email accounts, social  
networking logins, and other similar account information. For  
example, a Facebook account login name might differ from a  
corporate email account login because they are maintained  
separately and for different groups of people.  
• Mark as default: allows you to assign default numbers, email, etc..  
• Send namecard via: allows you to send the current Contact entry’s  
information to an external recipient via either Bluetooth Email  
,
(Exchange or Internet), Gmail, or Messaging  
Contact Entry Options  
1. From the Home screen,  
tap  
.
This device can synchronize with multiple accounts (such as  
Facebook, Twitter, MySpace, Microsoft Exchange, Google, or  
T-Mobile). When you synchronize your phone with those  
accounts, each account creates a separate contact entry in the  
Contacts list.  
.
2. Touch an entry to reveal the  
Contact entry’s Overview  
Screen. This screen contains  
Name, contact numbers,  
email, and linked contact  
information.  
If one of your contacts (Amy Smith) has a regular email account  
that you maintain in Gmail, but also has a Facebook account  
under her maiden and married name, as well as a Video! chat  
account, when you merge those accounts into your Contacts list  
you can join all of her entries and view the information in one  
record.  
Joining contact information makes sending messages easy. You  
can select any account email address or information all from one  
screen, versus searching multiple, individual screens to locate  
the desired account information.  
3. Press  
to reveal the  
context menu specific to this  
entry.  
Contact Overview Screen  
4. Tap an available option.  
Contacts  
88  
       
Next time you synchronize your phone with your accounts, any  
updates contacts make to email account names, email  
addresses, etc. automatically update in your contacts list.  
Important!: It is the second contact image that is displayed for both buy the  
first contact’s name that is used.  
For example: If Amy (original entry) is joined with Julie (second  
entry). Julie appears to disappear and only Amy remains. Tap the  
Amy entry (showing the Julie image) to view both.  
For more information about synchronizing accounts, see “Get  
5. Touch the main linked contact to view the contact  
information you linked. The contacts and information  
displays with an icon next to the contact name to indicate  
what type of account information is contained in the entry.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
2. Tap a contact name (the name you want to link to another  
entry).  
Note: Typically this is the same contact with a different name or account  
Unjoining a Contact  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
information.  
.
3. Press  
and then tap Join contact.  
2. Tap a contact name (the account name from which you  
4. Tap the second contact entry (the entry in which to link).  
The second contact is now linked with the first and the  
account information is merged into one screen.  
want to unjoin an entry). This reveals the details for entry.  
Note: Typically this is the same contact with a different name or account  
information.  
Note: The information is still maintained in both entries, but displays in one  
3. Tap the Joined contacts area.  
record for easier viewing when you link the contacts.  
4. Tap  
next to the entry you want to unjoin. The  
contacts are “unjoined” or separated and no longer display  
in the merged record screen. Both contacts now go back to  
being separately displayed.  
89  
Marking a Contact as Default  
Sending a Namecard  
When you use applications such as the Voice Dialer or other  
messaging type applications, the application needs to know  
which information is primary (default) in a contact entry list. For  
example, when you say “Call John Smith”, if you have three  
phone records for John Smith, the Voice dialer is looking for the  
“default” number or entry.  
A Namecard contains contact information, and can be sent to  
recipients as a Virtual Business Card (V-card) attachment using  
Bluetooth, Google Mail, or as a message.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
2. Tap a Contact entry.  
3. Press  
and then tap Send via and select a delivery  
Email, Gmail, or Messaging  
The Mark as default option marks one entry in a contact record to  
use as the default. This comes in handy when you have multiple  
entries for the same person (see Linked contacts).  
method: Bluetooth  
,
.
The Namecard attaches to the selected message type and  
is delivered when you send the message.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
2. Tap a Contact entry.  
Sending All Current Namecards  
3. Press  
and then tap Mark as default. The Mark as  
Rather than selecting once Contact entry at a time, you can send  
all of your current entries at once.  
default screen displays radio buttons next to the contact  
name, phone number, or other contact information.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press and then tap Import/Export  
via  
.
4. Tap the radio button next to the entry information you want  
Send namecard  
to be the primary information (such as name, phone  
.
number, or email) and select Save  
.
3. Tap Select all to place a check mark alongside all currently  
displayed Contact entries.  
Contacts  
90  
               
4. Tap Send and select a delivery method:  
Copying Contact Information  
• Bluetooth to transmit this contact to another bluetooth-compatible  
Copying Contact Information to the SIM Card  
device.  
The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your  
Contacts list is your phone’s built-in memory. This procedure  
allows you to copy numbers saved to the phone’s memory, onto  
the SIM card.  
• Email to attach the contact card to a new outgoing email (Exchange  
or Internet).  
• Gmail to attach the contact card to a new outgoing Internet-based  
email.  
• Messaging to attach the contact card to a new outgoing text  
message.  
Note: These must be contacts stored on the phone. External entries (Google,  
Exchange, etc...) can not be transferred in this manner.  
Sending a namecard using Bluetooth  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
You must create a Contact prior to sending a namecard to a  
recipient. For more information, refer to “Creating a Contact” on  
page 82.  
2. From the Contacts List, press  
and then tap  
Import/Export  
Export to SIM card.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
3. Tap Select all to choose all current phone contact entries.  
– or –  
2. Touch and hold the entry to reveal the on-screen context  
menu.  
Select a specific entry by touching an entry. A check mark  
indicates a selection.  
3. Tap Send namecard via  
Bluetooth.  
4. Tap Export. The name and phone number for the selected  
Important!: You must activate Bluetooth to use this feature.  
contact is then copied to the SIM.  
4. Tap the Bluetooth device in which to send this name card.  
Bluetooth forwards the namecard to the recipient.  
91  
       
Copying Contact Information to the microSD Card  
Synchronizing Contacts  
This procedure allows you to copy entry information saved on the  
phone’s memory, onto the SIM card.  
Syncing data from your managed accounts allows you to add and  
manage a new or existing contact from your online or remote  
accounts to your phone. Prior to syncing, you must first have an  
active Google or Microsoft Exchange account with current  
Contact entries, and be signed into your account via the phone.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
2. From the Contacts List, press  
and then tap  
Import/Export  
Export to SD card.  
With syncing, any Contacts entries (with phone numbers, email  
addresses, pictures, etc.) are updated and synced with your  
phone. For more information about syncing existing managed  
3. Tap OK to choose all current phone contact entries.  
1. Press  
sync  
and then tap  
Accounts and  
.
2. Locate the email account containing the contacts you wish  
to synchronize.  
3. Tap  
within the adjacent account field to reveal the  
account’s synchronization settings screen.  
4. To synchronize Contacts, tap Sync Contacts. A green  
checkmark indicates the feature is enabled.  
Note: The process of updating your Contacts tab can take several minutes. If  
after 10-20 minutes, your list has not been updated, repeat step 2-3.  
Contacts  
92  
     
5. Your Contacts tab then reflects any updated Contact  
• Choose contacts to display allows you to filter Contacts based on  
category entries from within the locations such as: Phone SIM  
T-Mobile Contacts Backup Google, and Microsoft Exchange  
ActiveSync  
,
,
information.  
,
.
Note: Syncing of contacts requires you are logged into your Gmail and  
3. Tap Done  
.
Corporate accounts via the device.  
Get Friends  
Display Options  
When you synchronize applications such as Facebook, Twitter,  
MySpace, a corporate email account, or Google, using the Get  
Friends option synchronizes the data from the selected account  
type with your Contacts list.  
The Display options menu allows you to allows you to choose  
whether to display contacts saved from the Phone, SIM, T-Mobile  
Contacts Backup, external source, or all. You can also choose to  
display only contacts that have phone numbers.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press and then tap Display options. Configure any of  
the following options:  
.
2. Press  
and then tap Get friends  
Add account  
Add account  
.
3. Determine which type of account information you want to  
synchronize with your Contact list. Selections are:  
• Only contacts with phones allows you to display only those  
contacts containing phone numbers.  
Facebook, Twitter, MySpace, Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync,  
• Sort by defines how the current list of Contacts are sorted: First  
name or Last name  
.
Google, Facebook, Video Chat, or T-Mobile Contacts Backup  
.
• Display contacts by defines how the current list of Contacts are  
listed: First name first (ex: Steve Smith) or Last name first (Smith,  
Steve).  
4. Tap an account type to add.  
5. Follow the prompts. The selected account type  
synchronizes with your Contacts list.  
93  
                 
6. After synchronizing accounts you may want to link contact  
Choose from: Sync all  
,
Sync with existing contacts, or Don’t  
sync  
.
3. Tap Finish to complete the login and sync process.  
4. From the Home screen, tap to confirm your  
To add Facebook content to your Contacts list:  
Facebook contacts are now synchronized and appear in  
your Contacts list.  
You can now add your Facebook contact information, such as  
pictures, email, and phone numbers directly to your Contacts list.  
All of their current contact information is then migrated over to  
your phone. If a Contacts entry already exists with a slightly  
different name, separate entries are created and can later be  
linked (joined) together into a single entry.  
To resync Social Network Contacts:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Contacts tab.  
2. Press  
and then tap Sync SNS data  
.
My Profile  
Important!: This process not only synchronizes your contact information but  
also your status, events, and more.  
You can send this Virtual Business Card (V-card) to other contacts  
as an attachment. My Profile is the first Contact listed in the  
Contacts list.  
1. Log into your Facebook account:  
From the Home screen, tap  
Facebook).  
Enter your account’s access Email and Password information and  
tap Login  
(
Applications  
)
Note: As with any profile, your profile can be associated with a group.  
(
To create My Profile:  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press and then tap More  
.
2. Tap those contact settings you wish to synchronize (all are  
enabled by default). A green circle indicates the feature is  
enabled.  
My profile.  
3. Enter information into the various fields.  
4. Tap Save to store the new entry.  
Contacts  
94  
     
To edit My Profile:  
Export/Import  
1. With My profile displayed, press  
and then tap Edit.  
2. Modify any of the information contained in My Profile, then  
tap Save  
Contact List Settings  
.
From this menu you can determine the default storage location  
for Contacts, display you phone’s primary number, and view  
service numbers listed in your Contact list.  
Additional Contact Options  
Sending an Email to a Contact  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press and then tap More  
.
Note: Contacts must contain and email account and address before you can  
use the Send email feature.  
Settings.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press and then tap More  
contain an email address display.  
.
3. Select one of the following options:  
• Save new contacts to: defines the default storage location of new  
Send email. Contacts that  
Contacts. Choose from: Always ask Phone SIM T-Mobile  
,
,
,
Contacts Backup Google, or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync  
,
.
3. Tap the contact to which you want to send an email. A  
• Own numbers: displays the number for this device.  
check mark displays next to the selection.  
• Service numbers: displays the list of Service Dialing Numbers  
(SDN) assigned by your service provider. These numbers include  
emergency numbers, customer service numbers and directory  
inquiries.  
Note: The select contact must have an email as part of their details screen.  
4. Tap Add  
.
5. Select an email account type.  
6. Compose the email and tap Send  
.
95  
             
Removing an Entry From a Caller Group  
Groups  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Groups tab.  
This feature allows you to add a new or existing contact to a call  
group. This group can be one of the already present groups  
(Family, Friends, or Work) or a user-created group.  
2. Touch a group entry.  
3. Press  
and then tap Remove member.  
Creating a New Caller Group  
4. Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this group.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Groups tab.  
A checkmark displays next to contact entry.  
2. Press and then tap Create  
.
5. Tap Remove.The contacts are removed from the group.  
3. Tap the Group name field and use the on-screen keypad to  
enter a new group name. For more information, refer to  
Editing a Caller Group  
To edit a Group entry, there must be at least one member as part  
of the selected group.  
4. Tap Ringtone and select a ringtone for the group.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Groups tab.  
Selections are: Default ringtone Sound, or Phone Ringtone.  
,
2. Touch a group entry.  
5. Tap Save to store the newly created group  
3. Press  
and then tap Edit group  
.
Adding an Existing Entry to a Current Caller Group  
4. Make modifications to the Group name or Ringtone fields.  
For more information, refer to “Creating a New Caller  
Group” on page 96.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Groups tab.  
2. Tap a group entry ➔  
(Add member).  
3. From the list of contacts, tap the contact(s) you want to  
5. Tap Save  
.
add. A checkmark displays next to contact entry.  
4. Tap Add. The selected contacts are added to the group.  
Contacts  
96  
             
Sending a Message to a Group  
The History Tab  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Groups tab.  
The History tab is a list of the phone numbers that have been  
received, missed, and returned. For more information, refer to  
2. Tap an existing group,  
and press  
and then  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
tap Send message  
.
2. Tap the History tab.  
3. Select the recipients of  
the new message  
3. Press  
. The following options are available:  
• Delete: allows you to delete calls or messages from History. Select  
(indicated by a green  
checkmark). If an entry  
contains multiple phone  
numbers, each must be  
selected individually.  
a call or message and tap Delete  
.
• Viewby: allows you to select the type of displayed calls, messages,  
or emails. Selections are: Call, Message, Email, Facebook,  
MySpace, Twitter, or Select all. Touch the items you want to display  
then tap Done  
.
The Updates Tab  
From the Updates tab you can view updated contact information  
that were synchronized with Facebook, Myspace, or Twitter.  
4. Tap Send  
5. Type your message, and  
tap Send  
.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
Note: You must log in to an SNS account (Facebook, Myspace or Twitter)  
before you can view the Updates.  
2. Tap the Updates tab. The updates display.  
97  
       
Section 7: Messages  
This section describes how to send or receive different types of  
messages. It also explains the features and functionality  
associated with messaging.  
The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you send and  
receive multimedia messages (such as picture, video, and audio  
messages) to and from other mobile phones or email addresses.  
To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to your service  
provider’s multimedia message service.  
Types of Messages  
Your phone provides the following message types:  
Text Messages  
Important!: When creating a message, adding an image, a sound file, or a  
video clip to a text message changes the message from a text  
message to a multimedia message.  
Multimedia (Picture, Video, and Audio) Messages  
IM Messages  
Email and Gmail Messages  
Google Talk  
Messaging icons are displayed at the top of the screen and  
indicate when messages are received and their type. For more  
Message Icons on the Status Bar  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
message  
(Messaging) New  
Icons are displayed on the Status Bar at the top of the display  
when new messages are received. For more information, refer to  
.
2. Tap on the To field to manually enter a recipient or select  
one of the following:  
Creating and Sending Messages  
The Short Message Service (SMS) lets you send and receive text  
messages to and from other mobile phones or email addresses.  
To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to your service  
provider’s message service.  
• Recent: to select a recipient from a list of recently sent messages.  
• Contacts: to select a recipient from your Contacts list (valid entries  
must have a wireless phone number or email address).  
• Group: to select a recipient from the Group list.  
Messages  
98  
               
3. If adding a recipient from either Recent, Contacts, or  
Group, tap the contact to place a checkmark then tap Add  
The contact displays in the recipient field.  
• Attach: allows you to attach the following:  
Slideshow: allows you to create up to a 10 page slideshow to  
attach to the message.  
.
Pictures: allows you to tap an existing image from your Pictures list to  
add it to your message.  
Note: For the Group option, if the number of recipients is less than 10, all  
Videos: allows you to tap an existing video file you wish to attach. The  
selected video is automatically attached to the current message.  
members in the group are added. Delete any unnecessary members in  
the list by selecting the trash can icon and deleting unwanted entries.  
Audio: allows you to choose an existing audio file from the Audio  
list, then add it to your message by tapping OK  
Capture picture: allows you to temporarily exit the message, take a  
4. Tap the Type to compose field and use the on-screen  
.
photo with phone’s camera, then add it to your message by touching  
Save  
.
5. Add more recipients by tapping the Recipient field.  
Capture video: allows you to temporarily exit the message, record a  
video clip using the phone’s, then add it to your message by  
6. Review your message and tap Send.  
touching Save  
.
Record audio: allows you to temporarily exit the message, record an  
audio clip using the phone’s microphone, then add it to your message  
Note: If you exit a message before you touch send the message  
automatically saves as a draft.  
by tapping  
Add.  
Message Options  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Messaging).  
2. From within an open message, press  
to display  
additional messaging options:  
• Add/Remove subject: inserts or deletes a Subject field in your  
message.  
99  
     
Contacts: allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry to  
add their contact info to your message.  
Viewing Newly Received Messages  
When you receive a message, your phone notifies you by  
Calendar: allows you to tap on an existing Calendar event and add it  
to your message.  
displaying  
within the Notification area at the top left of  
your Home screen.  
Memo: allows you to tap on an existing Memo and add it to your  
message.  
To read a message:  
• Add text: allows you to add text items from sources such as:  
Contacts, Calendar, Memo, and Text templates.  
1. Open the Notification Bar and select the message. For  
– or –  
• Insert smiley: allows you to add insert smiley icons images  
(emoticons).  
• Delete messages allows you to either delete a specific  
message bubble from the current message or choose to  
Select all to delete the entire message thread.  
From the Home screen, tap  
then tap the new  
message to view. The selected message displays on the  
screen.  
• More: provides the following additional options:  
Discard, Call, or Add to Contacts.  
2. Tap  
to play a multimedia message.  
3. In a single motion, touch and scroll up or down the page to  
scroll through the message (if additional pages were  
added).  
Messages  
100  
       
Message Threads  
6. Tap Send to review your reply.  
– or –  
Sent and received text and  
picture messages are grouped  
into message threads.  
Threaded messages allow you  
to see all the messages  
exchanged (similar to a chat  
program) and displays a  
contact on the screen.  
Current Recipient  
My Text  
Press  
messaging options: View contact  
text Insert smiley, or More (Delete messages, Discard, and  
and then tap Send to select one of these  
,
Add subject Attach  
,
,
Add  
,
Call).  
To access additional Bubble options:  
Touch and hold the message bubble to display the  
following options:  
Message threads are listed in  
the order in which they were  
received, with the latest  
• Delete message: deletes the currently selected message bubble  
from the thread.  
message displayed at the top.  
• Add to Contacts: adds the current caller to your Contacts list.  
To reply to a text message: From  
• Copy message text: copies the currently selected message bubble  
from the thread.  
the Home screen, tap  
.
4. While the message is  
open, tap the Type to  
• Lock/Unlock message: locks or unlocks the currently selected  
message bubble from being accidentally deleted.  
Reply Bubble  
Text Message Thread  
compose field and then  
type your reply message.  
• Forward: allows you to forward the currently selected message  
bubble to an external recipient.  
• Copy to SIM: copies the currently selected message bubble as a  
5. Compose your reply.  
single text message within the SIM card.  
Your texts are colored Blue and your caller’s reply’s are  
Yellow.  
• View message details: displays details for the currently selected  
message bubble.  
101  
     
3. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or phrase in  
which to search, then tap  
Deleting Messages  
Deleting a single message  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
.
4. All messages that contain the entered search string  
display.  
2. Touch and hold a message from the list, then select Delete  
thread  
.
Messaging Settings  
To configure the settings for text messages, multimedia  
messages, Voice mails, and Push messages.  
3. At the prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to cancel.  
Deleting multiple messages  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press and then tap Settings  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
.
2. Press and then tap Delete Threads  
.
The following Messaging settings are available:  
3. Tap each message thread you want to delete. A checkmark  
Storage settings  
displays beside each selected message.  
• Delete old messages: deletes old messages when the limit is  
reached, rather than overwriting them.  
4. Tap Delete  
.
Text message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many text  
5. At the prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to end the  
messages are allowed in one conversation.  
process.  
• Multimedia message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many  
multimedia messages are allowed in one conversation.  
Message Search  
You can search through your messages by using the Message  
Search feature.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press and then tap Search  
.
.
Messages  
102  
                 
Text message (SMS) settings  
Warning: the phone will warn you via pop up messages that you are  
creating a multimedia message which does not fit the Core MM Content  
Domain.  
• Delivery reports: when this option is activated, the network informs  
you whether or not your message was delivered.  
Free: you may add any content to the message.  
• Manage SIM card messages: allows you to manage the  
messages stored on the SIM card.  
Notification settings  
• Notifications: allows you to see message notifications on your  
• Message center: allows you to enter the number of your message  
center where your messages reside while the system is attempting  
to deliver them.  
status bar.  
• Select ringtone: allows you to set the ringtone for your message  
notifications.  
• Input mode: allows you to set the input mode for your text  
messages. Choose GSM Alphabet, Unicode, or Automatic.  
Text Templates  
Reply path: allows you to set the reply path for each message you  
send messages.  
This screen displays your available text message reply  
templates. This is a readily accessible list of both default and  
user-defined text snippets that can be used to quickly reply to  
incoming messages.  
Multimedia message (MMS) settings  
• Delivery reports: when this option is activated, the network informs  
you whether or not your message was delivered.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
• Read reports: when this option is activated, your phone receives a  
request for a read reply along with your message to the recipient.  
2. From the Messaging list, press  
and then tap Text  
templates  
.
• Auto-retrieve: allows the message system to automatically retrieve  
messages.  
3. Tap a message to immediately insert it into your current  
• Roaming auto-retrieve: allows the message system to  
automatically retrieve while roaming.  
message conversation.  
• Creation mode: allows you to select the creation mode, Free,  
Restricted, or Warning.  
Restricted: you can only create and submit messages with content  
belonging to the Core MM Content Domain.  
103  
     
To create your own text template:  
POP (Post Office Protocol) - This protocol is supported by most ISPs  
(Internet service providers) and common among consumer  
applications. POP3 is the current standard.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
2. rom the Messaging list, press  
and then tap Text  
Creating an Internet Email Account  
templates  
3. Tap  
4. Enter a new text string and tap Save  
Email  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Applications) ➔  
(Create template).  
(Email). If you already have email accounts, your accounts  
.
screen is displayed.  
2. Enter you email address in the Email address field. The  
Email (or Internet Email) enables you to review and create email  
using several email services. You can also receive text message  
alerts when you receive an important email. Your phone’s Email  
application lets you access and manage multiple email accounts  
simultaneously in one convenient location.  
phone will try to resolve.  
3. Enter your password in the Password field, tap Next then  
press Next  
.
Tap Manual setup to configure your connection settings manually  
(POP3 or IMAP). Follow the on-screen prompts and enter the  
information specific to your email provider.  
There are currently three main types of email accounts on your  
phone: Gmail, Internet-based email (Gmail, Yahoo, etc..), and  
Microsoft Exchange (Corporate email or Outlook ).  
®
The unique account name is used to differentiate this account from  
other email accounts accessed by your device.  
To send and receive email messages through an ISP (Internet  
Service Provider) account, or if you wish to use your device to  
access your corporate email through a VPN (Virtual Private  
Network), you will first need to set up an IMAP or POP account.  
4. Tap Next at the Your accounts screen.  
5. At the prompt name the account and enter a screen name  
to identify yourself on this account. If you have already  
setup this account, skip to step 6.  
IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) - This protocol is frequently  
used in large networks and commercial settings. IMAP4 is the current  
standard.  
Messages  
104  
               
6. Messages for this account display on the Inbox tab. You  
can also view Personal information for this account,  
Receipts (if you setup the account to return receipts),  
Travel information, and more (if available).  
Composing Email  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Email).  
2. Press  
and then tap Accounts  
.
3. Select an email account.  
4. Tap Inbox and press  
7. Tap Done to store the new account.  
.
5. Tap Compose  
.
Important!: Only some “Plus” accounts include POP access allowing this  
program to connect. If you are not able to sign in with your  
correct email address and password, you may not have a paid  
“Plus” account. Launch the Web browser to access your  
account.  
6. Enter the message recipient’s email address in the To field.  
If you are sending the email message to several recipients, separate  
the email addresses with a comma. You can add as many message  
recipients as you want.  
Opening an Email  
Use the Cc field to carbon copy additional recipients.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Email).  
Use the Bcc field to blind copy additional recipients.  
2. Press and then tap Accounts  
.
7. Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject.  
3. Select an email account and tap an email message.  
8. Tap the email text field and compose your email message.  
Refreshing Email messages  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
To add a picture attachment, tap Attach (from the bottom of the  
screen) and make a selection.  
(Email).  
9. Once complete, tap Send  
.
2. Select an email account.  
3. Press  
and then tap Refresh.  
105  
       
Configuring Email Settings  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
• Vibrate: Activates a vibration when a new email message is  
received.  
(Email).  
• Incoming settings: Lets you specify incoming email settings, such  
as username, password, and IMAP server.  
2. Press  
and then tap Accounts  
.
• Outgoing settings: Lets you specify outgoing settings, such as  
3. Select an account.  
4. From the email list screen, press  
username, password, and SMTP server.  
and then tap More  
• Recent messages: Lets you assign the number of recent  
messages that are displayed on-screen. Choose from: 25 - Total.  
Account settings  
.
5. Alter any of the following settings:  
• Forward with files: Lets you include attachments when forwarding  
an email.  
• Account name: displays your uniquely created account display  
name.  
• Add signature: Lets you attach a customized signature to the  
bottom of all outgoing emails.  
Your name: displays the name used in the From field of your  
outgoing email messages.  
• Signature: Lets you create an email signature for your outgoing  
Gmail email messages.  
• Email check frequency: Tap to adjust the time interval used by  
your device to check your email account for new email messages.  
• Default account: Assign this account as the default email account  
used for outgoing messages.  
• Security policy list: lists the current email’s security policy. These  
policies could restrict some functions from corporate servers.  
• Email notifications: Activates the email notification icon to appear  
within the Notifications area of the status bar when a new Internet  
mail (Gmail, etc..) is received.  
• Select ringtone: Plays a selected ringtone when a new email  
message is received.  
Messages  
106  
   
4. Enter a Domain, and confirm your Username, and Password  
information and tap Next  
Microsoft Exchange Email (Outlook)  
.
Your phone also provides access to your company’s Outlook  
Exchange server. If your company uses either Microsoft  
Exchange Server 2003 or 2007, you can use this email  
application to wirelessly synchronize your email, Contacts, and  
Calendar information directly with your company’s Exchange  
server.  
If your network requires SSL encryption, tap the Accept all SSL  
certificates field to place a check mark in the box and activate this  
additional level.  
Important!: If your exchange server requires this SSL feature, leaving this  
field unchecked can prevent connection.  
Setting Up a Microsoft Exchange Email account  
5. If prompted with a connection or Auto discover failed error,  
tap OK and manually enter your Exchange server  
information within the appropriate field.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Email).  
2. If you already have other email account setup:  
Press  
Press  
and then tap Accounts  
.
• Exchange Server: your exchange server remote email address.  
Typically starts with mail.XXX.com. Obtain this information from  
your company network administrator. Do not accept the default  
entry as this is a guess based on returned information.  
and then tap Add account  
.
– or –  
Enter your Email address and Password information, and  
then tap Next. Consult your Network or IT Administrator for  
further details and support.  
Important!: It is recommended that you delete any text in the Exchange  
server field and enter your server information manually.  
6. With the new server information entered, tap Done  
7. Read the on-screen activation disclaimer and, if prompted,  
tap Yes  
8. Adjust the various on-screen configuration fields and tap  
Next  
Next.  
• Email address: your Outlook work email address.  
• Password: typically your network access password (case-  
sensitive).  
.
3. Tap Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (from the add new  
email account screen).  
.
107  
     
9. Identify your new account with a unique name and provide  
the outgoing name text then tap Done  
5. Enter the message recipient’s email address in the To field.  
.
Use the Cc field to carbon copy additional recipients.  
Use the Bcc field to blind copy additional recipients.  
Important!: You might be prompted to activate additional device  
administration features if required by your server. Tap Activate to  
accept the administration function.  
If you are sending the email message to several recipients,  
separate the email addresses with a comma. You can add as many  
message recipients as you want.  
Opening an Exchange Email  
6. Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Email).  
7. Tap the email text field and compose your email message.  
2. Press and then tap Accounts  
.
To add a picture attachment, tap Attach (from the bottom of the  
screen) and make a selection.  
3. Select an exchange email account and tap an email  
Tap the file you wish to attach and tap OK  
.
message.  
8. Once complete, tap Send  
.
Refreshing Exchange Email  
Deleting an Exchange Email Message  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Select an exchange email account.  
3. Press and then tap Refresh  
(
Email).  
Touch and hold an email (from your inbox list) and select  
Delete from the on-screen context menu.  
– or –  
.
Composing Exchange Email  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
With the email message displayed, press  
tap Delete  
and then  
(
Email).  
.
2. Press  
and then tap Accounts  
.
3. Select an exchange email account.  
4. Tap Inbox and press and then tap Compose  
.
Messages  
108  
       
Configuring Microsoft Exchange Email Settings  
• Empty server trash: allows you to delete your email account’s  
trash bin remotely.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
Accounts and  
• Sync schedule allows you to configure your email sync schedule.  
sync.  
• Email size configures the incoming email size allowed to pass  
through to your phone automatically without user interaction. Larger  
emails will have to be retrieved manually.  
2. Tap  
within the Microsoft Exchange account field to  
reveal the account’s synchronization settings screen.  
• Security policy list: lists the current email’s security policy. These  
3. Toggle either the Sync Contacts or Sync Calendar fields to  
force the device to manually resync either the exchange  
Contacts or Calendar entries.  
policies could restrict some functions from corporate servers.  
• Email notifications enables the phone to display a status bar icon  
when new email messages have been received.  
– or –  
• Select ringtone assigns an audible ringtone when a new or  
upcoming event is pending.  
Tap Account settings and specify any other email settings  
• Vibrate assigns a vibration when a new or upcoming event is  
pending.  
you wish to synchronize:  
• Exchange server settings provides access to the Domain,  
password, and exchange server settings.  
• Account name displays the name used by the device to track the  
account.  
• SyncContacts synchronizes the contacts between your phone and  
• Amount to synchronize to assign the sync range for your incoming  
and outgoing email messages between your phone and your  
external exchange server. How many days worth of email  
the remote exchange server.  
• Sync Calendar synchronizes your exchange calendar entries  
between your phone and the remote exchange server.  
messages should the phone and server synchronize. Choose from:  
1 day 3 days, 1 week, 2 weeks, or 1 month.  
,
• Period to sync Calendar assigns a period for your phone to sync  
calendar events.  
• Default account assigns this account as the default used when  
sending out new email messages.  
• Add signature activates the email signature feature.  
• Out of office settings assigns this account’s out of office settings.  
• Signature allows you to create an outgoing email signature  
attached to new email messages sent from your phone.  
109  
 
4. Press  
to return to the previous page.  
Refreshing Google Mail  
From within the Gmail message list, press  
and then  
Using Google Mail  
tap Refresh to send and receive new emails and  
Google Mail (Gmail) is Google’s web-based email. When you first  
setup the phone, Gmail is configured. Depending on the  
synchronization settings, Gmail is automatically synchronized  
with your Gmail account.  
synchronize your email with the Gmail account.  
Composing a Gmail Message  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(
Gmail).  
Signing into Google Mail  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. From the Gmail Inbox, press  
and then tap Compose  
.
(Gmail).  
3. Enter the recipients Email address in the To field.  
Note: You must sign in to your Gmail account in order to access features  
such as Google Mail and Android Market.  
Tip: Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a comma.  
2. Tap Next to add a Google account.  
4. Press  
and select Add Cc/Bcc to add a carbon or blind  
3. Tap Create if you do not have a Google account.  
copy.  
– or –  
5. Enter the subject of this message in the Subject field.  
Tap Sign in if you have a Google account.  
6. Tap the Compose Mail field and begin composing your  
The Inbox loads conversations and email.  
message.  
Opening Gmail  
7. Once complete tap  
(Send).  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Gmail).  
2. Tap an existing email message.  
Messages  
110  
                 
Viewing a Gmail Message  
Google Talk  
1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap a message to view. The  
following options are available:  
Google Talk™ is a free Windows and web-based application for  
instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs are  
automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account. This  
allows you to search a chat log and store them in your Gmail  
accounts.  
• Archive: archives the selected Email.  
• Delete: deletes the Email.  
• <: displays older Emails.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Talk).  
• >: displays newer Emails.  
2. Tap Next to add a Google account.  
2. Press  
options:  
to select one of the following additional  
3. Tap Create if you do not have a Google account.  
– or –  
• Change labels: changes the label on the email or conversation.  
Tap Sign in if you have a Google account. The Inbox loads  
• Mark unread: unread messages or threads with unread messages  
display in boldface text in the Inbox.  
conversations and email.  
• Go to inbox: displays the Google Mail Inbox.  
4. After entering your user name and password, tap the Down  
• Mute: mutes the conversation.  
Navigation key.  
• Add/Remove star: click a message's star to add or remove the  
star (just like clicking flags in Outlook).  
5. Tap Sign in.  
• More  
:
6. Begin using Google Talk.  
Report spam: reports the Email message as spam.  
Settings: allows you to configure the General, or Notification settings.  
Note: The Network confirms your login and processes. This could take up to  
5 minutes to complete.  
Help: launches the browser and displays Google Mobile Help  
information.  
Select text: allows you to select text to copy and paste.  
111  
     
Section 8: Multimedia  
This section explains how to use the multimedia features of your  
phone, including the Camera/Camcorder, Music Player, and how  
to manage your photos, images and sounds.  
2. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,  
adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject.  
3. Before you take a picture, zoom in or out by using either:  
This section explains how to use the camera on your phone. You  
can take photographs and shoot video by using the built-in  
camera functionality. Your camera produces photos in JPEG  
format.  
The Up and Down Volume keys.  
Tapping the screen with two fingers and then dragging outwards.  
You can magnify the picture up to x4 (400 percent).  
4. If desired, before taking the photo, touch the left tab to  
Important!: Do not take photos of people without their permission.  
Do not take photos in places where cameras are not allowed.  
Do not take photos in places where you may interfere with  
another person’s privacy.  
access various camera options and settings.  
5. You can also touch the screen to move the focus to the  
area you tap.  
Using the Camera  
6. Press the Camera key until the shutter sounds. (The picture  
is automatically stored within your designated storage  
location. If no microSD is installed, all pictures are stored  
Taking Photos  
Taking pictures with your device’s built-in camera is as simple as  
choosing a subject, pointing the camera, then pressing the  
camera key.  
Note: When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright conditions, shadows  
may appear on the photo.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Camera).  
Multimedia  
112  
           
2. Camera / Camcorder Mode: allows you to take a photo in  
various modes. Once you change the mode, the  
corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the  
display. Choose from Camera or Camcorder.  
1
8
2
3
7
3. Shooting mode: allows you to set the following options:  
4
5
• Single shot: takes a single photo and view it before returning to the  
shooting mode.  
6
• Smile shot: the camera focuses on the face of your subject. Once  
the camera detects the person’s smile, it takes the picture.  
• Panorama: takes a landscape photo by taking an initial photo and  
then adding additional images to itself. The guide box lets you view  
the area where the second part of the panoramic picture should fall  
within.  
Camera and Camcorder Options  
You can change options using your keypad in capture mode.  
Camera Options  
• Beauty: adjusts the contrast to smooth facial features.  
The following short cuts are available for the camera:  
• Continuous: takes a succession of consecutive photos by pressing  
and holding the Camera key.  
Note: The options disappear after a few seconds. Touch the screen to display  
the tab, then touch the tab to view these options.  
• Vintage: gives your photo a vintage look (hazy around the edges).  
Touch the icon in the lower left corner of the display screen to  
choose a Normal, Warm, Cool, or Mono effect.  
1. Front/Rear: allows you to activate either the front facing or  
rear camera lenses.  
• Add me: combines people with existing background. Touch the  
screen to pick which side of the screen to focus on. Press the  
camera key. Focus on a background and press the camera key a  
second time.  
• Cartoon: gives your photo a cartoon look.  
113  
     
• Action shot: detects action and creates a panorama of the moving  
• Scene mode: to select a camera setting for better image capture  
under different lighting environments. Choose from: None (default),  
Portrait, Landscape, Night, Sports, Party/Indoor, Beach/Snow,  
Sunset, Dawn, Fall color, Firework, Text, Candlelight and Backlight.  
object.  
4. Default Dest.: sets the default destination for sending or  
saving pictures. Selections are: Recent recipient  
,
Phone  
• Timer: allows you to set a time delay before the camera takes the  
photo. Select the length of delay you want and touch the Off,  
2 sec, 5 sec, and 10 sec. When you press the Camera key, the  
camera takes the photo after the specified time elapses.  
Book Online Album New Email, or New Number  
,
,
.
5. Exposure: sets the total amount of light allowed to fall on  
the subject through the lens sensor while taking a  
picture.Touch and drag the slider to the left (to decrease  
the value), to the right (to increase the value). You can also  
touch the Minus icon (to decrease the value) or the Plus  
icon (to increase the value).  
• Resolution: sets the photo resolution to: 2560x1920, 2560x1536,  
2048x1536, 2048x1232, 1600x1200, 1600x960, 640x480, or  
800x480.  
• White balance: allows you to set this option from the following  
choices: Auto, Cloudy, Fluorescent, Daylight, or Incandescent.  
• Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply special effects  
to the photo. Options include: Normal, Black and White, Negative,  
or Sepia.  
6. Image viewer: displays the photo for quick viewing.  
7. Camera button: takes a photo when pressed in Camera  
• ISO: allows you to adjust the ISO sensitivity of the camera imaging  
sensor. Selections are: ISO Auto, ISO 100, ISO 200, ISO 400, or  
ISO 800 speed.  
mode.  
8. Settings: displays two types of settings, Camera (first tab)  
• Metering: allows you to set how the camera measures or meters  
the light source: Centre weighted, Spot, or Matrix.  
and General settings (second tab).  
Camera settings  
:
• Anti-Shake: allows you to touch On to activate Anti-Shake, or Off  
to deactivate it.  
• Outdoor visibility: enhances LCD visibility outdoors.  
• Auto contrast: automatically sets the contrast.  
• Focus mode: sets the focus mode to: Auto focus, Macro (close up  
photos), or Face detection (recognizes there is a face in the shot  
and optimizes exposure for it).  
• Blink detection: camera detects the user's blinks and adjusts to  
capture the subject perfectly.  
Multimedia  
114  
• Image quality: allows you to set the image quality to: Superfine,  
Camcorder Options  
Fine, or Normal.  
You can change options using your keypad in capture mode. The  
following short cuts are available:  
• Adjust: allows you to adjust the Contrast, Saturation and Sharpness  
for this photo.  
General settings  
:
1
2
8
• Guidelines: displays alignment or framing guidelines to perfectly  
set up each shot.  
• Review: displays the photo for review.  
• GPS tag: records GPS information into image files.  
7
6
3
4
5
• Shutter sound: allows you to select a tone to play when the  
camera’s shutter opens and closes. Sound selections are Sound 1,  
Sound 2, Sound 3, or Off.  
• Reset: resets the camera settings to the default settings.  
Touch Screen: allows you to assign an action when you tap the  
screen. Choose from Focus or Capture.  
1. Front/Rear: allows you to activate either the front facing or  
rear camera lenses.  
2. Camcorder / Camera Mode: allows you to record a video  
various modes. Once you change the mode, the  
corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the  
display. Choose from Camcorder or Camera.  
3. Recording mode: Normal or Limit for MMS.  
115  
 
4. Default Dest.: sets the default destination for sending or  
saving videos. Selections are: Recent recipient, Phone  
Book, Online Album, New Email, or New Number.  
• Resolution: sets the video resolution to: 1280x720, 720x480,  
640x480, 320x240, or 176x144.  
• White balance: allows you to set this option from the following  
choices: Auto, Cloudy, Fluorescent, Daylight, or Incandescent.  
5. Exposure: sets the total amount of light allowed to fall on  
the subject through the lens sensor while recording a  
video. Touch and drag the slider to the left to decrease the  
value, or to the right to increase the value. Or touch the  
Minus icon to decrease the value, or the Plus icon to  
increase the value.  
• Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply special effects  
to the photo. Options include: Normal, Black and White, Negative,  
or Sepia.  
• Video quality: allows you to set the video quality to: Superfine, Fine,  
or Normal.  
• Adjust: allows you to adjust the Contrast, Saturation and Sharpness  
for this video.  
General settings  
:
6. Image viewer: displays the video for quick viewing.  
• Guidelines: displays alignment or framing guidelines to perfectly  
set up each recording.  
7. Camcorder button: records a video when pressed in  
Camcorder mode.  
• Audio recording: activates audio recording feature so you can  
record audio while recording the video.  
8. Settings: displays two types of settings, Camcorder (first  
• Review: set to On to review the recorded video.  
tab) and General settings (second tab).  
• Reset: resets the camcorder settings to the default settings.  
Camcorder settings  
:
Touch Screen: allows you to assign the Capture action when you  
tap the screen.  
• Outdoor visibility: enhances LCD visibility outdoors.  
• Timer: allows you to set a time delay before the camcorder records  
the video. Select the length of delay you want and touch the Off,  
2 sec, 5 sec, and 10 sec. When you press the Camera key, the  
camcorder records the video after the specified time elapses.  
Multimedia  
116  
 
Pictures and Videos Image Viewer Options  
Camera Gallery Options  
After you take a photo or record a video, you can access various  
options.  
The Gallery is where you can access the Gallery of stored camera  
images.  
Photo options  
1. From the Home screen,  
• Share: allows you to share a picture using AllShare, Messaging,  
tap  
(
Applications  
)
Bluetooth, Picasa, Facebook, Email, Gmail, Kodak, or Snapfish.  
(Gallery).  
• Set as: sets the photo as a Contact icon, Home screen Wallpaper,  
or Lock screen Wallpaper.  
2. Select a folder location  
(ex: Camera) and select  
an image by tapping it  
once to place a green  
check mark on the file.  
• More  
:
Send to My Album Online: sends this photo to My Album Online.  
Set Default Destination: sets the default photo location to: Recent log,  
Contacts, Online album, New Email address, or New Phone number.  
Delete: deletes this photo.  
3. Press  
from this  
Video options  
main Gallery screen to  
reveal gallery-specific  
• Share: allows you to share a video using AllShare, Messaging,  
Bluetooth, YouTube, Facebook, Email, Gmail, Kodak, and Snapfish.  
• Play: plays the current video using the Video Player.  
options Share  
,
Delete,  
• More  
:
and More  
.
Send to My Album Online: sends this video to My Album Online.  
Set Default Destination: sets the default photo location to: Recent log,  
Contacts, Online album, New Email address, or New Phone number.  
Delete: deletes this video.  
117  
                   
Camera Image Options  
When you take a picture, the file is saved in the Photo folder. You  
can view your pictures immediately or view them anytime in the  
Photo folder.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Gallery).  
(Applications) ➔  
(
2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it in the  
Image viewer. Touch and drag a picture to the left to see  
the next picture or to the right to see the previous picture.  
3. Tap Slideshow to initiate an on-screen slideshow  
displaying every image in the current folder.  
– or –  
Tap Menu to display the following image menu options:  
• Share: lets you share selected pictures with AllShare, Messaging,  
Bluetooth, Picasa, Facebook, Email, Gmail, Kodak, or Snapfish.  
• Delete allows you to delete the current image.  
:
Multimedia  
118  
 
• More: provides you with the additional options such as:  
3. With the image displayed, tap Menu  
Contact icon  
4. Tap a contact to make a selection.  
5. Crop the image and tap Save  
More  
Set as  
Send to My Album Online: allows you to send the file to your  
.
pre-configure My Album Online.  
Set Default Destination: allows you to assign a default action to take  
after taking an image (Recent log, Contacts, Online album, New Email  
address, or New Phone number).  
.
Assigning an Image as a Wallpaper  
Details: files details such as Title, Type, Date taken, Album, Location,  
latitude, Longitude, etc..  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Applications) ➔  
Set as: allows you to assign a picture to one of three location: Home  
screen Wallpaper, Lock screen Wallpaper, or to a Contact’s icon image.  
(Gallery).  
2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it in the  
Crop: provides an on-screen box that allows you to crop the current  
picture. Tap Save to update the image with the new dimensions or  
Discard to ignore any changes.  
Image viewer.  
3. With the image displayed, tap Menu  
More  
Set as.  
Add to Slideshow: adds the selected photo to a custom slideshow.  
4. Select one of the two options:  
Rotate left: allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a  
counterclockwise direction.  
• Home screen Wallpaper assigns the current image to the home  
screen background. This image is spread across all available  
screens.  
Rotate right: allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a  
clockwise direction.  
Assigning an Image as a Contact Icon  
Applications) ➔  
• Lock screen Wallpaper assigns the selected image to the  
background for the lock screen.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Gallery).  
(
5. Touch and drag the crop box anywhere on the picture.  
Touch and drag the sides of the crop box to zoom in or out  
to create a cropped area.  
(
2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it in the  
Image viewer.  
119  
           
6. Tap Save to assign the wallpaper image.  
– or –  
3. Press the record video key ( ) to begin shooting video.  
4. Tap to pause the recording or touch to stop the  
Tap Discard to stop without updating the wallpaper image.  
recording and save the video file to your Photo folder.  
5. Once the file is saved, tap Play to play your video for  
Using the Camcorder  
In addition to taking photos, the camera also doubles as a  
camcorder that also allows you to record, view, and send high  
definition videos.  
review.  
6. Press  
to return to the viewer.  
Camcorder Options  
Note: To ensure the Camcorder can record the video, use an SDHC memory  
Camcorder options are represented by icons across both sides of  
the screen.  
card.  
Shooting Video  
Tip: When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright conditions, it is  
recommended that you provide your subject with sufficient light by  
having the light source behind you.  
Accessing Videos  
When you shoot a video, the file is saved in the Camera folder.  
You can view your videos immediately or view them anytime in  
the Camera folder.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Applications) ➔  
(
Camcorder) to activate the camcorder mode.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Gallery).  
(
Applications) ➔  
2. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,  
(
adjust the image by aiming the camcorder at the subject.  
Multimedia  
120  
           
2. Select a folder location and tap a video icon to begin video  
Amazon MP3  
playback.  
– or –  
Amazon MP3 is a digital music store owned and operated by  
Amazon.com. Using Amazon MP3 you can download DRM-Free  
(digital rights management) MP3 formatted songs and albums.  
Touch and hold the video icon from the main Gallery to  
select the video (green check mark) and display the  
following video menu context options:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Amazon MP3).  
(Applications) ➔  
(
2. Tap one of the categories to begin browsing the  
• Share: lets you share selected pictures with AllShare, Messaging,  
Bluetooth, YouTube, Facebook, Email, Gmail, Kodak, or Snapfish.  
music files.  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to download music.  
• Delete allows you to delete chosen/selected pictures. Touch the  
checkmark, to turn it green, next to any file or folder you want to  
delete, then touch Delete.  
:
Note: A data plan is required to use this feature. Charges may apply. Please  
contact your service provider for further details.  
• More: provides you with the additional options such as:  
Send to My Album Online: allows you to send the file to your  
pre-configure My Album Online.  
Files  
Files allows you to manage your sounds, images, videos,  
bluetooth files, Android files, and other memory card data in one  
convenient location. This application allows you to launch a file if  
the associated application is already on your phone (ex: MP4 and  
DivX).  
Set Default Destination: allows you to assign a default action to take  
after shooting video (Recent log, Phonebook, Online album, New Email  
address or New Phone number).  
Details: displays video file information.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Files).  
(Applications) ➔  
(
121  
           
The Gallery  
Note: Navigation in this viewer works on a hierarchy structure with folders,  
subfolders, etc.  
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos. For  
photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a  
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or caller image, and share as  
a picture message.  
Opening and Navigating within Files  
DCIM is the default location for pictures or video taken by the  
device. These files are actually stored in the DCIM folder location.  
Note: If the phone displays a memory full message when accessing the  
Gallery, access Files and remove some of the media files from the  
folders, and then open the Gallery.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Files).  
(Applications) ➔  
(
2. Tap a folder and scroll down or up until you locate your  
Opening the Gallery  
selected file.  
From the Home screen, tap  
(Applications) ➔  
• Up tab allows you to back up into a higher directory.  
(
• Home tab allows you to back up to the root directory.  
Press  
displayed on-screen. Choose from: List  
Thumbnail  
Press  
Delete  
Bluetooh, Bluetooth visibility, and Settings).  
and then tap View by to change the way the files are  
,
List and details, or  
Note: If you stored your files in folders (directories) on the storage card,  
Gallery displays these folders as separate albums. The top left album  
contains all the pictures in the storage card.  
.
for these additional options: Share  
,
Create folder  
,
,
View by List by, and More (Move, Copy, Rename, Print via  
,
3. Once you have located your file, tap the file name to  
launch the associated application.  
Multimedia  
122  
     
Using the Video Player  
Media Hub  
The Video Player application plays video files stored on the SD card.  
Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie and  
TV content. With hundreds of titles available, entertaining your  
family on the go was never easier. You can rent or purchase your  
favorite content and watch from any location. Featuring the  
stunning viewing quality Samsung is known for, Samsung Media  
Hub is your gateway to mobile video like you've never  
experienced it before.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Applications) ➔  
(Videos). A list of videos sorted on the SD card  
displays in the Video list.  
2. Touch a video file to begin viewing.  
INCEPTION  
The movie INCEPTION comes preloaded on the memory card  
included with this phone.  
Note: Media Hub usage is based on service availability.  
1. Confirm the preloaded memory card is in the SD slot. For  
Important!: You must be using an active Wi-Fi/4G connection to preview and  
download a media file.  
You must have a microSD card installed prior to initiating the  
service. This card acts as a storage location for your downloaded  
rental or purchase.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
(Inception).  
3. Log into Media Hub (required the first time you tap the  
page 123. The movie plays back within the built-in video  
player application.  
Warning!: If the microSD card is accidentally reformatted, or the movie file is  
manually deleted, you will be unable to retrieve or replace the  
deleted movie file.  
123  
             
Creating a New Media Hub Account  
• My Media: allows you to view all of the media that you have  
purchased or rented. Touch a media entry to view it.  
Before you can rent or buy media, you must first create an  
account. Enter the required information.  
• Movie Store: displays movies that are available for rent or  
purchase. Scroll through the movie categories at the top of the  
screen. Touch a category and movies of that type display.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
MediaHub).  
and tap My Account  
3. Use the keypad to enter the required information, then tap  
Create Account  
4. From the My Account screen, you can edit parameters  
such as: My Details My Purchases My Payment Methods  
Manage My Devices Log out, or Reset Media Hub  
Using Media Hub  
(Applications) ➔  
(
• TV Store: displays TV shows that are available for purchase. Scroll  
through the movie categories at the top of the screen. Touch a  
category and TV shows of that type display.  
2. Press  
.
4. Scroll through the media listings and tap on an item you  
.
would like to purchase or rent.  
5. Tap WATCH PREVIEW to watch a short preview or tap Rent  
,
,
,
or Own  
.
,
.
6. Choose a payment method and then follow the on-screen  
instructions. The media stores to the My Media folder.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
MediaHub).  
(Applications) ➔  
Media Hub Notices  
(
Any media item (Media Content) may be rented or purchased after you  
create an account in Media Hub.  
2. Read the End-User License Agreement (EULA) and tap  
Media Content that is downloaded may be viewed concurrently on up  
to five (5) devices with Media Hub that are also registered to the same  
account.  
Accept to continue or Decline to exit.  
3. At the Media Hub screen select one of the following  
options:  
You may choose to remove a device from your account no more than  
once every 30 days.  
• What’s new: shows recently added media that is available for rent  
or purchase.  
Multimedia  
124  
   
You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as you’d  
like. You will have the ability to re-download the Media Content at a  
later point in time subject to content re-download availability and  
studio permissions.  
In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period of  
more than thirty (30) days (or shorter on a title-by-title basis) after  
the Media Content has been rented (e.g., if you begin viewing  
rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental transaction,  
but do not finish viewing the entire title, that rented Media Content  
may not be available for the entire twenty-four (24) consecutive  
hour period if such period would extend the viewable time beyond  
the thirty (30) day rental window).  
You MUST be in network coverage to license Media Content you have  
acquired through the Service.  
You must have Wi-Fi connectivity in order to download Media Content.  
You cannot play any media content downloaded from Media Hub  
through any output on your mobile phone, including All Share.  
Unlike purchased Media Content, rented Media Content will be  
viewable on only 1 device in your account.  
Media Content is downloaded and saved onto the SD card.  
Your Media Content may pause/stop or not download in networks  
where there is a weak signal.  
Music Player  
Playing Music  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Applications) ➔  
You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a)  
license acquisition has occurred and b) sufficient amount of the Media  
Content has been buffered.  
(
Music Player). Music player tips display.  
2. Tap Done  
3. Tap a tab to select the music category: All  
Albums Artists or Genres  
.
You must finish watching rented Media Content within 24 consecutive  
hours of start of playback.  
,
Playlists,  
,
.
Stopping, pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not  
extend the available viewing time.  
4. Scroll through the list and tap an entry to begin playback.  
Note: The 5.1 channel sound effect works when earphones or sound is  
connected through the earphone port only.  
125  
     
5. The following Music Player controls are available during  
Music Player Options  
playback:  
The Music Player Settings menu allows you to set preferences for  
the music player such as whether you want the music to play in  
the background, sound effects, and how the music menu  
displays.  
Pause the song.  
Start the song after pausing.  
With the music player application displayed and a song  
playing, press  
options:  
and select one of the following  
Press and hold to rewind the song. Tap to go to  
previous song.  
• Add to quicklist: adds the selected music file to a quick playlist.  
Press and hold to fast-forward the song. Tap to go  
to next song.  
• Via Bluetooth: plays the music through a Bluetooth stereo headset.  
Volume control.  
• Share music via: shares a music file via Messaging, Bluetooth,  
Email, or Gmail.  
5.1Ch  
Allows you to listen to music using 5.1 Virtual  
Surround Sound.  
( ( ) )  
• Setas: sets this song as a Phone ringtone, Caller ringtone, or Alarm  
tone.  
Plays the entire song list once.  
• Go to disc view: displays the selections in a circular, cd disc view.  
Repeats the currently playing song.  
Replays the current list when the list ends.  
shuffles the current list of songs randomly.  
songs play in order and are not shuffled.  
• More:  
Add to playlist: adds a song to the playlist.  
Settings: allows you to activate or deactivate the Equalizer, Effect, or  
Visualization. Also allows you to set which Music menus you want to  
display. Selections are: Albums, Artists, Genres, Folders, Composers,  
Years, Most played, Recently played, or Recently added. Tap each item  
that you want to display in the Music menu.  
Stop playing music: stops playing the currently selected song or  
playlist.  
Multimedia  
126  
         
Details: displays details about the selected music.  
4. Press  
– or –  
Tap  
and tap Add.  
Using Playlists  
Playlists are used to assign music files into groups for playback.  
These Playlists can be created using the Music player on this  
device, or using a third-party application (such as Windows  
Media Player) and downloading those files to an SD card inserted  
into the device.  
(
Add music).  
Note: If a playlist is empty, add a song by touching a holding a song name  
from the main screen to open the context menu. Select Add to playlist  
.
5. Tap a music file, or tap Select all to add all the music tracks  
to this playlist then tap Add  
Creating a Playlist  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Music Player).  
2. Tap the Playlists tab.  
3. Press Create  
4. Backspace over the default playlist title and type a new  
name for this playlist, then tap Save  
(Applications) ➔  
Removing Music from a Playlist  
(
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Applications) ➔  
(Music Player).  
.
2. Tap the Playlists tab.  
3. Tap the playlist name in which to delete music.  
.
4. Touch and hold a song to reveal the on-screen context  
Adding Music to a Playlist  
menu.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Music Player).  
2. Tap the Playlists tab.  
3. Tap the playlist name in which to add music.  
(Applications) ➔  
5. Tap Remove  
OK.  
(
127  
             
Editing a Playlist  
Removing Music Files  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Applications) ➔  
Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist, you can  
also share, delete, or rename the playlist.  
(
Music Player).  
Only those playlist you have created can be edited. Default  
playlists can not be renamed.  
2. Tap the All tab.  
3. Touch and hold a song entry to reveal the on-screen  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Music Player).  
2. Tap the Playlists tab.  
(Applications) ➔  
context menu.  
(
4. Tap Delete  
OK. The music file(s) is deleted.  
T-Mobile TV HD  
3. Touch and hold a playlist entry to reveal the on-screen  
T-Mobile TV HD is an application that allows you to get live TV  
and Video on Demand.  
context menu.  
4. Tap Edit title  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Applications) ➔  
5. Enter a new name for this playlist and tap Save  
.
(
T-Mobile TV HD). The T-Mobile Terms and Conditions  
page displays.  
Transferring Music Files  
Music files can be downloaded to the phone using one of two  
methods:  
Note: A data plan is required to use this feature. Charges may apply. Please  
contact your service provider for further details.  
1. Downloaded to the phone from or Android Market.  
2. Tap Accept if you accept the Terms and Conditions, or tap  
Music files are directly stored on your phone.  
Exit  
.
2. Downloaded to the phone via a direct USB connection.  
Music files are stored into a Music folder on the SD card.  
Multimedia  
128  
           
Note: T-Mobile TV must be initialized over a cellular network before it can be  
used. During this initial registration process, any current Wi-Fi  
connections must be disabled.  
3. Tap Disable Wi-Fi if you currently have an active Wi-Fi  
connection.  
4. Tap any of the following categories to begin viewing: Live  
Channels  
Browse Live Channels, or Start Trial/Purchase  
YouTube  
,
Live TV  
,
On Demand, My Media, More Info,  
,
.
YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload  
and share videos, and view them in MPEG-4 format.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
YouTube).  
2. Tap Accept if you accept the Terms and Conditions, or tap  
Decline  
(Applications) ➔  
(
.
3. When the screen loads you can begin searching and  
viewing posted videos.  
4. Press  
Settings  
High quality on mobile if you  
prefer high quality output.  
129  
     
Section 9: Applications and Development  
Thissectionoutlinesthevariousapplicationsthatareavailableon  
your phone.  
Add to Home  
This shortcut allows you to add Widgets, Shortcuts, Folders, or  
Wallpapers to the Home screen. For more information, refer to  
Applications  
The Applications list provides quick access to all the available  
applications on the phone.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Add to Home).  
(Applications) ➔  
(
Refer to the application table on page 36 for a description of each  
Application, its function, and how to navigate through that  
particular application. If the application is already described in  
another section of this user manual, then a cross reference to  
that particular section is provided.  
Note: You can also locate an empty area of a selected screen and touch and  
hold an area to launch the Add to Home screen popup.  
Alarm & Clocks  
Accounts and sync  
Here you can set an alarm, configure and view the World clock,  
use a stopwatch, or set a timer. The applications display in a  
tabular format and quickly accessed with the touch of a finger.  
This application allows you to configure general synchronization  
settings that determine whether the background data is  
synchronized, and whether you automatically synchronize data  
with the phone.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Alarm & Clocks).  
(Applications) ➔  
(
Applications and Development  
130  
               
• Play file from server on my phone allows you to receive and  
playback media stored externally (server, laptop, etc.) directly on  
your device.  
AllShare  
This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung mobile  
phone with your TV, streams content and even keeps tabs on  
who calls or sends text messages with real-time, on-screen  
monitoring. Samsung’s AllShare makes staying connected easy.  
• Play file from server on another player via my phone allows you  
to “piggy-back” content playback on an external Wi-Fi TV/receiver.  
Your phone retrieves content from an external wireless source (eg.,  
server) and pushes it through to an external wireless destination  
(eg., TV). The phone acts to both route the media and control its  
playback (as a remote).  
Allows users to share their in-device media content with other  
external devices using DLNA certified™ (Digital Living Network  
Alliance) Devices. These external devices must also be  
DLNA-compliant. Wi-Fi capability can be provided to TVs via a  
digital multimedia streamer.  
Configuring AllShare Settings  
The AllShare™ application must first be configured prior to its  
initial use. You must setup parameters such as connected Wi-FI,  
Items to share, source server address, and external device  
acceptance rights.  
Important!: You must activate Wi-Fi to use this application. For more  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
AllShare).  
(Applications) ➔  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
AllShare).  
2. Follow the on-screen prompts.  
(Applications) ➔  
(
(
2. Tap Settings and configure the following settings as  
desired:  
The application contains three separate streaming media  
options:  
• Media server name allows you to enter the name of the server  
transmitting the media files. ex., MyServer. Once you enter the  
name tap Save.  
• Play file from my phone on another player allows you to play  
local device content on a Wi-Fi capable TV or playback device. The  
phone can then be used as a remote to control playback.  
• Share media allows you to configure which media types will be  
shared. Choose from Share video, Share audio, or Share picture.  
131  
     
• Access point network allows you to turn on your Wi-Fi  
functionality and connect to an available Wi-Fi Access Point.  
Receiving Media via AllShare  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Applications) ➔  
• Upload from other devices allows you to setup an acceptance rule  
of incoming media from other external devices. Choose from  
Always accept, Always ask, or Always reject and tap OK.  
(
AllShare).  
adjacent to one of the selected transmission  
2. Tap  
3. Press  
to return to the previous page.  
methods. (This procedure assumes selection of the second  
option.)  
Transmitting Media via AllShare  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
AllShare).  
adjacent to one of the selected transmission  
(
Applications) ➔  
3. Tap a source media server from the on-screen list. If you  
(
server does not appear, tap Refresh.  
2. Tap  
methods. (This procedure assumes selection of the first  
option).  
3. If transmitting local media to an external device, scroll  
through your microSD card folders to locate the file(s) you  
wish to transmit. A green checkmark indicates the file has  
been selected.  
4. Tap Add to playlist. Your phone then begins to search for  
compatible Wi-Fi devices.  
5. Tap a destination device from the on-screen list. If you  
desired device does not appear, tap Refresh  
.
Applications and Development  
132  
   
2. Select either store or player  
.
Amazon Kindle  
• store provides access to the amazon store where you can shop for  
Using your 3G connection you can download books through the  
Amazon Kindle™ application with no annual contracts, monthly  
fees, and no hunting for hotspots.  
millions of songs.  
• player allows you to stream your remotely stored pre-purchased  
music directly to your device.  
Important!: You must be registered with Amazon Kindle to use this feature.  
3. From within the store option, select an on-screen category  
(
Bestsellers, New Releases, Browse By Genre, or Search  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Amazon Kindle).  
2. Enter your registered email address and password and tap  
Register  
(Applications) ➔  
Amazon MP3).  
(
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to locate the desired  
track or album.  
.
5. Tap the song title to listen to an audio preview. Tap the  
– or –  
song title again to stop playback.  
Tap Create one now and follow the prompts.  
• Preview allows you to play an audio clip of the selected song.  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
6. Once you have located a desired song title or album, tap  
Amazon MP3  
[price]  
Buy.  
Amazon MP3 is a digital music store owned and operated by  
Amazon.com. Using you can download DRM-Free (digital rights  
management) MP3 formatted songs and albums. For more  
Pressing BUY allows you to purchase the song and download it to  
your device’s microSD card.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Amazon MP3).  
(Applications) ➔  
(
133  
       
Books  
Calculator  
Use Google Books to read over 3 million ebooks on the go.  
Using this feature you can use the phone as a calculator. The  
calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions; addition,  
subtraction, multiplication, and division. You can also use this as  
a scientific calculator.  
Build your ebooks library in the cloud with Google Books: jump  
right into a bestseller or select from nearly 3 million free ebooks.  
Personalize the reader to your liking, pick up reading where you  
left off on your phone or computer, and settle down with a great  
book on your Android phone!  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Calculator).  
(Applications) ➔  
(
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Books).  
(Applications) ➔  
2. Enter the first number using the numeric keys.  
(
3. Enter the operation for your calculation by touching the  
2. If prompted, tap Turn sync on. This synchronizes your  
books you have previously selected between your Books  
account and your device.  
Plus, Minus, Multiplication, or Division key.  
4. Enter the next number.  
5. To view the result, tap the  
=
(equals) key.  
3. Tap  
ebooks.  
to begin searching for both free and paid  
6. Repeat steps 1 to 4 as many times as required.  
4. Follow the on-screen prompts to download the ebook to  
Note: Place the screen in Landscape mode (sliding screen open) to reveal  
additional scientific functions.  
your phone.  
Applications and Development  
134  
           
• Delete: allows you to delete All events, All events before today, or  
Calendar  
an individual event.  
With the Calendar feature, you can consult the calendar by day,  
week, or month, create events, and set an alarm to act as a  
reminder. Google Calendar is built into the phone and  
synchronizes both new and existing entries between your phone  
and your online Google account.  
• Settings: displays a list of configurable settings.  
To manually sync calendar events:  
1. Press  
sync  
and then tap  
Accounts and  
Important!: You must have previously added an account (Facebook, Microsoft  
Exchange ActiveSync, or Google) prior to using the Calendar.  
.
2. Locate the email account containing the events you wish to  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Applications) ➔  
synchronize.  
(Calendar). The Calendar displays four tabs:  
3. Tap  
within the adjacent account field to reveal the  
• Month: displays the Month view.  
• Week: displays the Week view.  
• Day: displays the Day view.  
account’s synchronization settings screen.  
4. Tap Sync Calendar to activate the synchronization of  
calendar events between your device and the remote  
exchange server. A green checkmark indicates the feature  
is enabled.  
• List: allows you to search for events for the selected Month, Week,  
or Day. Or you can look for events for a future date.  
2. Press  
and select one of the following options:  
• Search: allows you to search within current events.  
• Create: creates a new Event.  
• Go to: displays a specific date.  
Today: displays the date highlighted with a Blue box highlighting  
the date.  
135  
   
Call logs  
Camera  
The Call log lists all the calls missed, received, or dialed.  
Contacts  
The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your  
Contacts List is your phone’s built-in memory.  
Use your 5.0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a JPEG  
format.  
Note: An SD card must be inserted before the Camera will take and store  
photos.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Camera).  
(Applications) ➔  
(
Camcorder  
Use your built-in camera lens to activate the camcorder and  
record videos that are stored on the microSD card.  
Car Home  
Configuresthephone’suserinterfacetobeeasiertousewhileyouare  
driving.  
From the Home screen, tap  
(Applications) ➔  
(
Camcorder) to activate the camcorder mode.  
Warning!: Please use this application responsibly.  
Note: An SD card must be inserted before the Camcorder will take and store  
video.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Car Home).  
2. Read the on-screen disclaimer and tap Accept  
(Applications) ➔  
(
.
The screen is laid out with the most common on-screen applications  
available for quick access.  
To reset your phone’s interface back to the default layout:  
From the Car Home screen, tap Exit  
.
Applications and Development  
136  
             
Desk Home  
DriveSmart  
Configures the phone’s user interface to mimic a desktop layout.  
The DriveSmart application can be used to reduce distractions from  
your phone by silencing notifications, routing calls to voicemail and  
customizing auto responses to both callers and text message  
respondents notifying them that your driving.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Desk Home).  
(Applications) ➔  
(
The screen is laid out with commonly used on-screen applications  
available for quick access.  
Warning!: Using your mobile device while driving may divert your attention  
from your responsibilities as a driver, result in an accident or other  
injury and could be a violation of law.  
To reset your phone’s interface back to the default layout:  
From the Desk Home screen, tap Exit  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Applications) ➔  
Downloads  
DRIVE  
(DriveSmart).  
SMART  
Provides quick access to tabs containing a list of your current  
downloaded files (Internet and Other).  
2. Tap OK and begin configuring the on-screen application  
options:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Downloads).  
(Applications) ➔  
• Upgrade to DriveSmart Plus allows you to upgrade the phone’s  
standard version to a more robust version of the application.  
(
Tap an available file category tab (Internet downloads or  
• DriveSmart enables or disables the DriveSmart application.  
Other downloads) and select the desired file.  
• Enable Bluetooth activates Bluetooth and routes all incoming calls  
to your handsfree device.  
• Enable Auto Response enables or disable an automatic SMS text  
message response to all incoming text messages notifying users  
that you are currently driving and can not answer a text.  
• Edit Auto Response allows you to edit the default text message  
response or create your own. After editing the response tap OK.  
137  
                           
3. Press  
Email  
to return to the previous screen.  
Gallery  
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos. For  
photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a  
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or caller image, and share as  
a picture message.  
Email enables you to review and create email using most email  
services. The device alerts you when you receive an email  
message.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Gallery).  
(Applications) ➔  
(
Facebook  
This application allows you to both access your Facebook page  
and synchronize contacts and posting between your phone and  
Google Mail  
Google Mail (Gmail) is a web-based email service. Gmail is  
configured when you first set up your phone. Depending on your  
synchronization settings, Gmail can automatically synchronize  
with your Gmail account on the web.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Facebook).  
2. Enter your Email and Password information and tap Login  
Files  
(Applications) ➔  
(
.
Organize and store data, images, and more in your own personal  
file folders. Files are stored to the memory card in separate (user  
defined) folders.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Files).  
(Applications) ➔  
(
Applications and Development  
138  
                 
Google Search  
Latitude  
Google Search is a web-based search engine that uses  
text-based queries to search for content on web pages.  
Google Latitude allows you and your friends share locations and  
status messages with each other. It also lets you send instant  
messages and emails, make phone calls, and get directions to  
your friends’ locations.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Applications) ➔  
(Google Search) and enter the search text.  
– or –  
Important!: You must sign in to your Google account, enable Wi-Fi, and  
enable the Location feature before you can use this application.  
Touch the microphone on the Google Search bar and say  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Latitude).  
(Applications) ➔  
(
2. If desired, tap Allow & Share to share your current location  
INCEPTION  
with your Google friends and contacts.  
This movie is preloaded on the SD card included with this device.  
1. Confirm the preloaded memory card is in the SD slot. For  
3. Tap Wi-Fi connection to turn on Wi-Fi if it is not already  
enabled.  
4. Tap the Enable location history field, then tap Detect your  
location to enable the Location feature.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
(Inception).  
You are now set up and ready to use Latitude.  
3. Log into Media Hub (required the first time you tap the  
page 123. The movie plays back within the built-in video  
player application.  
5. From the latitude friends page, press  
available application option such as: Refresh friends  
Check in, See map Add friends, or Settings  
and then tap an  
,
,
.
139  
         
• Layers: displays Layars entries from the following categories:  
Layar  
Search layers: allows you to search for your own Layar location.  
Featured: displays featured Layar locations.  
The Layar Reality Browser shows what is around you by  
displaying real time digital information on top of the real world as  
seen through your mobile phone. This technology is called  
Augmented Reality. Layar augments the real world as seen  
through your mobile phone, based on your location.  
Popular: displays the most popular Layar locations.  
New: displays new Layar locations.  
Categories: search for your own Layar location by categories.  
• Search: search for your own Layar location.  
How does Layar’s Augmented Reality work?  
• Settings: provides additional Layar features such as: Options,  
Layar works by using a combination of the mobile phone’s  
camera, compass and GPS data to identify the user’s location  
and field of view, retrieve data based on those geographical  
coordinates, and overlay that data over the view.  
Account, About Layar, and Intro.  
Maps  
Google Maps allow you to track your current location, view  
real-time traffic issues, and view detailed destination directions.  
There is also a search tool included to help you locate places of  
interest or a specific address. You can view locations on a vector  
or aerial map, or you can view locations at the street level.  
Important!: You must activate GPS to use this application.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Layar).  
(Applications) ➔  
(
Important!: Before using Google Maps you must have an active data (3G) or  
connection. The Maps application does not cover every country  
or city.  
2. Read the Layar terms and privacy statement and tap  
Accept. Layar initializes your favorites and performs  
updates. The displayed tabs provide the following  
information:  
From the Home screen, tap  
Maps).  
(Applications) ➔  
(
• Favorites: displays your favorite designated Layar locations.  
• Recent: displays your recently opened layers.  
Applications and Development  
140  
         
Enabling a Location source  
Opening Maps  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Applications) ➔  
Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search for  
places of interest, you must enable a location source. To enable  
the location source you must enable the wireless network, or  
enable the GPS satellites.  
(Maps).  
2. Locate the top row of the applications to access additional  
options:  
Important!: The more location determining functions are enabled, the more  
• Search Maps: allows you to search for a place of interest.  
accurate the determination will be of your position.  
• Places: provides access to the places menu where you can quickly  
locate a business or person, find out more information about a  
business, see coupons, public responses, and more (page 151).  
Locate and tap one of the listed places (Restaurants, Coffee, Bars,  
Hotels, Attractions, ATMs, Gas Stations, or Add your own place.)  
A list of places within this category displays.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
.
(Settings) ➔  
Location and security  
2. Tap Use wireless networks to enable GPS to determine  
location based on nearby cell towers.  
• Layers: allows you to switch map views:  
3. Tap Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite.  
Traffic: (available only in selected areas) Real-time traffic conditions are  
displayed over roads as color-coded lines. Each color represents how  
fast the traffic is moving.  
4. Tap Use sensor aiding to enhance positioning and save  
power using sensors.  
Satellite: Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth. Satellite  
images are not real-time. Google Earth acquires the best imagery  
available, most of which is approximately one to three years old.  
Tip: When using Google Maps you can turn on Enable GPS satellites.  
Selecting GPS satellites allows you to locate places of interest at the  
street-level. However, this also requires a clear view of the sky and uses  
more battery power.  
Terrain: combines a topographical view of the area’s terrain with the  
current map location.  
Transit Lines: allows you view added transit lines on the current map.  
Latitude: allows you to see your friend's locations and share your  
location with them.  
My Maps: allows you display pre-saved map entries.  
141  
         
Bicycling: allows you view bicycling trails on the current map.  
Terms, Privacy & Notices: displays the Terms and Conditions, Privacy  
Policy, or Legal Notices information. Select the desired information from  
the pop-up menu.  
Wikipedia: allows you view Wikipedia geo-tagged entries on the  
current map.  
About: displays general information about Google maps such as  
Version, Platform, Locale, Total data sent, Total data received, Free  
memory, etc.  
Clear Map: clears any current map overlays or selections.  
• My Location: when tapped, the location displays on the map with a  
blinking blue dot.  
Market  
3. Press  
and select one of the following options:  
Android Market provides access to downloadable applications  
and games to install on your phone. Android Market also allows  
you to provide feedback and comments about an application, or  
flag an application that might be incompatible with your phone.  
• Search: allows you to search for a place of interest.  
• Directions: displays navigation directions to a location from a  
starting point.  
• My Places: marks favorite locations on the map. These items are  
automatically synchronized with maps.  
Accessing the Market  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Market).  
(Applications) ➔  
• Clear Map: after viewing or following directions, this option resets  
the map.  
(
• Latitude: lets you and your friends share locations and status  
messages with each other. It also lets you send instant messages  
and emails, make phone calls, and get directions to your friends’  
locations.  
2. If not already logged in with your Google account, tap Next  
.
3. Tap Sign in and enter your Google account information.  
4. Tap Accept to agree to the Android Market terms of  
• More  
:
service.  
Labs: a testing ground for experimental features that are not ready to  
use publically.  
Cache Settings: allows you to alter cache settings such as: Prefetch  
on mobile and Clear map title cache.  
Help: uses the browser to display a searchable Google Mobile Help  
screen.  
Applications and Development  
142  
     
Downloading a New Google Application  
Note: Use caution with applications which request access to any personal  
data, functions, or significant amounts of data usage times.  
To download a new application, you will need to use your Google  
account to sign in to Android Market. The Android Market home  
page provides several ways to find applications. The home page  
features applications and includes a list of item applications by  
category, a list of games, a link to search, and a link to My  
downloads.  
5. If prompted, follow the on-screen instructions to pay for  
the application.  
6. Check the progress of the current download by opening  
the Notifications panel.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Market).  
(Applications) ➔  
7. After the item is downloaded and installed on your phone,  
(
the content download icon  
appears in the  
2. Browse through the categories, find an application you're  
notification area of the status bar.  
interested in, and tap the name.  
8. On the Android Market screen, press  
My apps, tap the installed application in the list, and then  
tap Open  
and then tap  
3. Read the application descriptions.  
.
Important!: If the selected application requires access to data or control of a  
function on your phone, Market displays the information the  
application will access.  
Tip: The newly downloaded application displays on the Home screen or other  
selected panel.  
Tap OK if you agree to the conditions of the application. Once you  
tap OK on this screen you are responsible for using this  
application on the phone and the amount of data it uses. Use this  
feature with caution.  
Note: A data plan is required to use this feature. Charges may apply. Please  
contact your service provider for further details.  
4. Tap Install  
.
143  
     
Manage applications  
Launching an Installed Google Application  
1. From the Home screen, tap Applications).  
(
This feature allows you to manage and remove installed  
applications. You can also view the amount of memory or  
resources used as well as the remaining memory and resources  
for each of the applications on your phone and clear the data,  
cache, or defaults.  
2. Tap the newly installed application. This application is  
typically located on the last Applications page.  
Android Development  
Press  
and then tap  
(
Settings) ➔  
This device can be used for Android application development.  
You can write applications in the SDK and install them on this  
device, then run the applications using the hardware, system,  
and network.  
Applications  
Manage applications  
.
Clearing application cache and data  
1. Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Warning!: Android Dev devices are not intended for non-developer end-  
users. Because the device can be configured with system  
software not provided by or supported by Google or any other  
company, end-users operate these devices at their own risk.  
Applications  
Manage applications  
.
2. Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data.  
3. Tap Force stop Clear data, Clear cache, or Clear defaults  
,
.
Unknown sources  
Uninstalling third-party applications  
This feature can be used for Android application development.  
The feature allows developers to install non-Market applications.  
You can uninstall any application you downloaded and installed  
from Android Market.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
1. Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Applications  
Unknown sources.  
Applications  
Manage applications.  
Unknown sources displays a check mark to indicate it is  
active.  
2. Tap the third-party application, and from the Application  
info screen, tap Uninstall  
.
Applications and Development  
144  
       
Memo options  
Media Hub  
1. While viewing the list of Memos, press  
one of the following options:  
• Create: allows you to create a memo.  
and select  
Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie and TV  
content. You can rent or purchase your favorite content and watch  
from the convenience of anywhere.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Media Hub).  
(Applications) ➔  
• Maximize: remove the bent, lower-right corner of the memo page  
and to maximize the information display.  
(
• Delete: allows you to delete one or more memos.  
Memo  
• Search: allows you to search within the current set of memos.  
2. Touch and hold the memo then select Send via and choose  
This feature allows you to create a memo.  
the method to send this memo: Bluetooth  
,
Email, or  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Memo).  
2. Tap Create memo to compose the new memo.  
3. Press to close the on-screen keyboard/keypad and  
change the background color.  
4. Tap Save  
(Applications) ➔  
Messaging  
.
(
3. From the memo list, tap the upper-left edit button and  
select a color for the memo’s background, then tap Save  
.
Messaging  
This application allows you to use the Short Message Service  
.
(SMS) to send and receive short text messages to and from other  
mobile phones. You can also use the Multi Media Service (MMS)  
to create multimedia messages to send and receive from other  
mobile phones.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Messaging).  
(Applications) ➔  
(
145  
             
Mini Diary settings  
Mini Diary  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Applications) ➔  
(
Mini Diary).  
This application allows you to create a mini diary where you can  
add a photo, and text to describe an event or other memorable  
life event.  
2. From the main Diary listings page, press  
Settings.  
3. Tap Selected city and tap the city for which you are  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Mini Diary). Any diary entries display in a list.  
If a diary already exists, tap Create diary  
(Applications) ➔  
documenting this entry.  
(
4. Tap Auto update if you want the settings to automatically  
.
update.  
2. Tap Tap to create memo to add text to your new memo.  
Deleting a Mini Diary entry  
Tap Done to store the new text.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(
(
Applications) ➔  
.
.
3. Tap Tap to add photo field to add a photo for this diary  
event and touch the source. Selections are: Camera or  
2. Press Delete all  
.
Images  
.
Mini Diary options  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
4. Tap the weather data icon in the upper, left corner (over the  
photo) and select a weather condition from the list to  
describe the weather conditions for this entry.  
Applications) ➔  
2. Select a diary.  
3. Press  
• Create: creates a new diary entry.  
• Delete: deletes the displayed entry.  
and select one of the following options:  
5. Tap Save  
.
• Publish: charges may apply when publishing (exporting). Touch Yes  
then select Facebook or MySpace.  
Applications and Development  
146  
         
• Change photo: replaces the photo in this entry by allowing you to  
The differences between My Account and My Device are these:  
take another photo or use another image.  
• My Account: check Activity, Set Alerts, review Billing, and review  
your current Plan and services.  
• Delete photo: deletes the photo from this entry when you touch Yes  
to confirm.  
• MyDevice: Personalize settings, Quick Tools, Support, and Storage  
& Battery.  
Music Player  
Music Player allows you to play music files that you have stored  
on your microSD card. You can also create playlists.  
Tip: Use the Menu key to toggle between My Account and My Device.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My Account).  
2. Read the on-screen information and tap OK  
(Applications) ➔  
From the Home screen, tap  
Music Player).  
(Applications) ➔  
(
(
.
My Account  
The initial screen displays four tabs: Activity, Alerts, Billing, and  
Plans Services.  
This option provides you with account specific information such  
as your current activity, billing information, Plan Services  
information. You can also set alerts for minute or message usage,  
payment reminder, or power saver.  
Activity  
The Activity tab displays your current minute and message  
activity. You can view what percentage of minutes were used as  
well as the number of messages used for a particular start date.  
Note: You may be prompted to log into the Android Market to receive the  
latest version of the T-Mobile My Account application.  
147  
     
Set Alerts  
My Device  
From this screen you can activate alerts to notify you of the  
following:  
Use the My Device application to configure device settings, view  
support information, personalize your CallerTunes, Ringtones, or  
Wallpapers, or view battery storage information.  
• Minute Usage: tracks the number of minutes used and remaining  
in your plan.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My Device).  
2. Read the on-screen information and tap OK  
(Applications) ➔  
Minute Usage Reminder: sends an alert when the number of minutes  
used reaches 75 percent of the total available minutes in the plan.  
(
.
Over Limit Alert: sends an alert when usage exceeds your plan’s total  
available minutes.  
Tip: Use the Menu key (  
) to toggle between My Account and My Device.  
• Message Usage: tracks the number of messages used and  
remaining in your plan. If you plan includes unlimited messages this  
setting does not apply.  
The differences between My Account and My Device are these:  
• My Account: check Activity, Set Alerts, review Billing, and review  
your current Plan and services.  
• Data Usage: tracks data used and remaining in your plan. If you  
plan includes unlimited data usage this setting does not apply.  
• My Device: Personalize settings, Quick Tools, Support, and Storage  
• Payment Reminder: alerts when your bill is due.  
& Battery.  
• Power Saver: sends an alert when the battery level reaches 30  
percent efficiency. The alert displays in the notification window. This  
alert is automatically set to On.  
The initial screen displays four tabs: Personalize, Quick Tools,  
Support, and Storage Battery.  
Billing  
Personalize My Device  
This provides a billing summary.  
Using this menu you can personalize CallerTunes, Ringtone, and  
Wallpapers.  
Plan  
• CallerTunes: personalize caller tunes.  
This screen displays specific information and charges for your  
current plan and services. The screen also displays additional  
services information and charges.  
Applications and Development  
148  
   
• Ringtones: you can personalize your phone’s ringtones when you  
Download HiFi Ringers, view Ringtone Subscriptions, access Voice  
Sounds, and access Phone Ringtones.  
Navigation  
Google Maps Navigation (Beta) is an internet-connected  
turn-by-turn, GPS navigation system with voice guidance.  
• Wallpapers: you can personalize your phone’s background by  
selecting wallpapers from the Shop, Gallery, Live Wallpaper, or the  
Wallpaper Gallery.  
Caution!: Traffic data is not real-time and directions may be wrong,  
dangerous, prohibited, or involve ferries.  
Quick Tools  
Quick Tools is a shortcut that allows you to activate Wi-Fi,  
activate and configure Bluetooth, activate and configure Data  
Roaming features, activate and configure GPS features, adjust  
the screen Brightness, set the Screen Timeout for the display,  
and view Phone Information.  
Important!: To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the  
following conditions:  
- inside a building or between buildings  
- in a tunnel or underground passage  
- in poor weather  
- around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields  
- in a vehicle with tinted windows  
Support  
From the Home screen, tap  
Navigation).  
Enabling GPS Location  
(Applications) ➔  
Displays support information My Account Feedback, T-Mobile  
Forums, T-Mobile on Twitter, and T-Mobile Tech Assist™.  
(
®
Storage & Battery  
1. Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
From this tab you can view Memory storage information for the  
phone or memory card. You can also view the battery level  
percentage and other information.  
Location and security  
2. Tap Use GPS satellites. A green check mark indicates the  
GPS location feature is enabled.  
149  
   
Navigation options  
Navigation Map options  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Navigation).  
Once on the map screen, you can access the following features:  
The navigation application can be configured from the  
main screen.  
Destination: returns you to the previous Navigation options screen.  
Search by voice: Speak your destination instead of typing  
(English only).  
2. Read the on-screen disclaimer and tap Accept  
.
Layers: allows you to switch map views:  
3. Choose from the following on-screen options:  
Traffic view: (available only in selected areas) Real-time traffic  
conditions are displayed over roads as color-coded lines. Each color  
represents how fast the traffic is moving.  
• Driving/Walking: configures the method of travel. Selection of  
Walking would negate the need to track traffic jams and  
obstructions.  
• Satellite: Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth.  
Satellite images are not real-time. Google Earth acquires the best  
imagery available, most of which is approximately one to three  
years old.  
Driving mode enables the Route options feature: allows you to  
configure your Route options such as: Avoid highways or Avoid tolls  
.
• Map: enables the on-screen real-time map functionality.  
• Parking: displays parking information relative to your current  
location.  
• Speak Destination: allows you to use the voice recognition feature  
to search for matching locations in your area.  
• Gas Stations: displays gas station location relative to your current  
location.  
• Type Destination: allows you to manually enter a destination  
address (via the on-screen keypad).  
ATMs & Banks: displays ATM and Bank locations relative to your  
current location.  
• Contacts: allows you to receive turn-by-turn directions to the  
address stored for a selected Contacts entry.  
• Restaurants: displays restaurant and eatery locations relative to  
your current location.  
• Starred Places: allows you to obtain directions to locations that  
have been starred within Google maps (maps.google.com).  
From within the Navigation map view, press  
options:  
for additional  
Search: manually search for a destination address, place, name of  
business, or even a type of business.  
Applications and Development  
150  
Set Destination: returns you to the navigation options screen where  
you can access a destination by either Speaking, Typing, or selecting  
from a Contacts entry or Starred Place.  
Places  
Google Places displays company logos on a layer of Google  
Maps. When viewing an area you can quickly locate a business  
or person, find out more information about the business, see  
coupons, public responses, and more.  
Layers: allows you to switch map views. See previous description.  
Mute: allows you to mute the audio readout and directional  
information.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Places).  
(Applications) ➔  
Exit Navigation: terminates the application.  
More: provides additional application information such as: Help and  
Term, Privacy & Notices.  
(
2. Use the Find places field to manually enter a desired place  
or choose from among the various categories. Matches are  
filtered by those closest to your current location.  
Caution!: Navigation is a beta product. Use caution.  
3. Locate and tap one of the listed places (Restaurants,  
Coffee, Bars, Attractions, ATMs, Gas Stations, Explore  
Nearby, or Add your own place.) A list of places within this  
category displays.  
News and Weather  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
News and Weather).  
2. Select from any of the available tabs: Weather  
U.S., Sports, and Entertainment  
To access the settings:  
1. Press and then tap Settings  
2. Tap an available option: Weather settings  
Refresh settings, and Application version  
(Applications) ➔  
(
,
Top Stories,  
4. Tap the Maps icon (upper-right) to launch the related maps  
.
feature.  
5. Press  
and then tap Latitude. The functions of this  
.
application are similar to those of the Navigation  
application, but work along with the Latitude service  
where you can share your location with your chosen  
Google friends.  
,
News settings,  
.
151  
       
3. Begin selecting the music you want to listen to.  
Settings  
This icon navigates to the sound and phone settings for your  
phone. It includes such settings as: display, security, memory,  
and any extra settings associated with your phone.  
Swype tips  
Using the SwypeTips application you can watch a video or start a  
tutorial that teaches you how to use Swype most efficiently.  
From the Home screen, tap  
(Applications) ➔  
From the Home screen, tap  
Swype Tips).  
(Applications) ➔  
(
Settings).  
(
– or –  
Press  
and then tap  
(Settings).  
T-Mobile TV HD  
T-Mobile TV HD is an application that allows you to get live TV  
and Video on Demand.  
Slacker  
From the Home screen, tap  
T-Mobile TV HD).  
(Applications) ➔  
Slacker offers free, internet radio for mobile phones.  
(
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Slacker).  
(Applications) ➔  
(
Talk  
Important!: You must register and create a free account prior to using this  
service.  
You can instant message with Google Talk. Google Talk allows  
you to communicate with other people who are also connected  
with Google Talk on the phone or on the web.  
2. Enter your Email address and password.  
– or –  
From the Home screen, tap  
Talk).  
(Applications) ➔  
Tap Create Account if you have not created an account.  
(
Applications and Development  
152  
                 
• Storage displays a visual graph indicating the available and used  
space within the internal phone storage location and External SD  
card.  
Task Manager  
Sometimes your phone might seem to slow down over time, and the  
biggest reason for this are background applications. These are  
applications that were not properly closed or shutdown and are still  
active but minimized. The Task Manager not only lets you see which  
of theseapplications are still activein the backgroundbut also easily  
lets you choose which applications are left running and which are  
closed.  
• Help provides additional battery saving techniques.  
4. From the Active applications tab, tap Exit to close selected  
applications or tap Exit all to close all background running  
applications.  
TeleNav GPS  
TeleNav GPS Navigator is a driving aid that uses both audible and  
visual directions for GPS navigation.  
Shutting Down Applications  
From the Home screen, tap  
Task Manager).  
(Applications) ➔  
(
1. From the Home screen, tap  
TeleNav GPS).  
(Applications) ➔  
– or –  
Press and hold  
(
then tap Task Manager. This screen  
2. If prompted, read the GPS Settings notification, tap the  
GPS Settings button and follow the on-screen prompts to  
enable the necessary GPS location feature.  
contains the following tabs:  
• Active applications display those currently active applications  
running on your phone.  
3. Read the agreement and tap Accept to accept the terms, or  
tap Exit to close the window. Wait for the application to  
load required first-time use files.  
• Downloaded displays any installed packages or applications from  
the Market that are taking up memory space. Tap Uninstall to  
remove them from your phone.  
• RAM displays the amount of current RAM (Random Access  
4. Select to either Upgrade to Premium or use the Continue in  
Memory) currently being used and allow you too Clear Memory  
.
Free Mode service.  
5. Enter the required information for TeleNav.  
153  
         
ThinkFree Office  
Video Chat  
ThinkFree Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office  
compatible office suite. This application provides a central place  
for managing your documents online or offline.  
This is a mobile video sharing and 2-way video calling service.  
This application also lets you record and share experiences with  
your friends, family, and your favorite social networks.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Video Chat) Sign up  
(Applications) ➔  
The application can also open Adobe PDF (Portable Document  
Format) files.  
(
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
ThinkFree Office).  
(Applications) ➔  
2. Fill in the Email address, Username, and Password, then  
(
tap Sign up to create your new account.  
2. Read the End User License Agreement, then tap Accept if  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions. For more information,  
you agree with the terms of use.  
To adjust application settings:  
1. Press and then tap Settings  
.
3. On its initial launch, tap Activate now.Three tabs display:  
• Home: displays the introduction to ThinkFree Office and lists a short  
description of each of the tabs and what type of information they  
provide.  
.
2. Choose from any of the following options:  
• My Docs: This is where you keep your documents on this device.  
You can manage documents, or send them to others, and upload  
the documents to ThinkFree Online.  
• Sharing allows you to setup sharing preferences.  
Facebook: set up your Qik credentials for Facebook posting of videos.  
Twitter: set up your Twitter account sharing preferences.  
YouTube: set up your Qik credentials for YouTube posting of videos.  
Contacts: set up your contact sharing parameters.  
• Online: This provides your thinkfree.com online storage  
information. You can also share your documents to others without  
using email attachments.  
Applications and Development  
154  
                       
• Location allows you to select the level of location accuracy that is  
embedded into your Qik videos. When posting or sharing Qik video  
information with others, you can decide how accurate the related  
Videos  
The Video Player application plays video files stored on your  
microSD card.  
location information can be. Choose from: Off  
,
City level, Street  
level, or Track live  
.
From the Home screen, tap  
Videos).  
(Applications) ➔  
• Video recording quality allows you to assign a video quality to the  
outbound video. Choose from: Low Normal, or High  
(
,
.
• About displays the version information for the Qik Video Chat  
application.  
Visual Voicemail  
Recording Qik Video  
Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who left a  
voicemail message, and listen to the any message they want  
without being limited to chronological order.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Video Chat) Record & Share  
2. Read the one-time disclaimer describing the public nature  
of your videos and tap OK  
(Applications) ➔  
(
.
From the Home screen, tap  
Visual Voicemail).  
(Applications) ➔  
.
(
3. Tap Record to start recording.  
– or –  
Voice Dialer  
Voice dialer is a voice recognition software used to activate a  
wide variety of functions on your phone.  
Tap Stop to end the recording process.  
4. Enter a title for your video segment and select those  
From the Home screen, tap  
Voice Dialer).  
(Applications) ➔  
services you wish to use to distribute your video.  
(
Services such as Twitter, Facebook, YouTube, SMS, and E-mail ask  
that you select a recipient for your video segment.  
155  
         
Voice Recorder  
Voice Search  
The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to one  
minute long and then immediately send it as a message.  
The Voice Search feature is a voice-activated application that  
allows you to tell the phone what to search for and then the  
phone activates a Google search based on what you said.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Voice Recorder).  
(Applications) ➔  
(
2. Tap the Record icon to record an audio file.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Voice Search).  
(Applications) ➔  
3. Tap Stop to stop recording. The file automatically saves to  
(
the Voice list.  
2. Select Agree if you want Google to use location for  
improved search results and other services, or Disagree to  
decline.  
4. Press  
and then tap Share and select a method in  
which to share this audio file. Selections are: Messaging,  
Bluetooth, Email, or Gmail. Refer to each specific section,  
depending on the method you selected to send this voice  
recording.  
3. At the Speak now screen speak your search command  
slowly and clearly.  
Google searches for the information and displays related  
information in the browser.  
Additional menu options include Delete, Rename, and Settings.  
Applications and Development  
156  
           
Web  
Write and Go  
Open the browser to start surfing the web. The browser is fully  
optimized and comes with advanced functionality to enhance the  
Internet browsing feature on your phone.  
Use write and go to job down an idea, then decide what format  
you want to use to save, send, or post it. You can send as a  
message, send to your Gmail account, Update to Facebook, save  
it in the Calendar or as a memo.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Web).  
(Applications) ➔  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Write and go).  
(Applications) ➔  
(
(
2. Compose the text then select one of the following:  
Wi-Fi Calling  
This feature allows you to make calls using a Wi-Fi over the  
T-Mobile network.  
• Send: sends as a Message or sends to your Gmail (or other email)  
account.  
• Update status: posts this text to your Facebook, MySpace, or  
Twitter account.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Wi-Fi Calling).  
(Applications) ➔  
(
• Save: saves the text to the calendar or as a memo.  
YouTube  
YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload  
and share videos, and view them in MPEG-4 format.  
Note: After you complete a connection to an active Wi-Fi network, the Wi-Fi  
Calling feature will automatically be enabled.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
YouTube).  
(Applications) ➔  
(
2. When the screen loads you can begin searching and  
viewing posted videos.  
157  
             
To configure YouTube Settings:  
Press and then tap Settings and configure the  
To watch a high quality video:  
While playing a video, press  
High quality on mobile  
and then tap Settings  
following parameters:  
.
• High quality on mobile, when enabled, allows you to start all  
videos in high quality mode while you are connected to a mobile  
network.  
• Caption front size allows you to set the font size used by on-  
screen captions. Choose from: Small, Medium, Large, or Extra  
Large.  
• Clear search history allows you to clear any previous YouTube  
searches from appearing within the search box.  
• SafeSearch filtering allows you to configure block settings for  
videos containing restricted content. This option blocks these  
videos from appearing within your search results. Choose from:  
Don’t filter, Moderate, or Strict blocking.  
• Help provides answers to most YouTube questions.  
• Feedback allows you to provide user feedback to YouTube.  
• Google Mobile Terms of Service  
YouTube Terms of Service  
• Google Mobile Privacy Policy  
YouTube Privacy Policy  
• Application version displays the software version for the current  
YouTube application.  
Applications and Development  
158  
   
Section 10: Connections  
Your phone is equipped with features that allow you to quickly  
connect to the web.  
Homepage  
When you access the Browser, the web2go home page displays  
the following topics:  
Web  
Google Search: allows you to quickly search for online topics using  
the Google search engine.  
Your phone is equipped with a Google browser to navigate the  
mobile web. This section explains how to navigate the browser  
and use the basic features.  
Advertisement: provides an on-screen advertisement bubble  
providing suggested phone applications.  
Accessing the Internet  
T-Mobile Mall: provides access to the T-Mobile Mall website.  
Yahoo Mail: displays the Sign in for Yahoo Mail. Register by sending a  
text message with the word START to 92500 if you are not already  
registered.  
To access the Browser:  
From the Home screen, tap  
Web).  
(Applications) ➔  
(
Facebook: displays the Facebook Log in. Sign up from this page if you  
are not already registered.  
Important!: To properly access the T-Mobile web2go area, you must first  
disable any current Wi-Fi connection.  
AccuWeather: based on your location settings, AccuWeather displays  
the current weather conditions.  
Note: If prompted with an on-screen message about options, tap CANCEL to  
CNN: displays current news headlines and more.  
ESPN: displays current sports news headlines and more.  
E! Online: displays current entertainment news headlines and more.  
Mapquest: provides access to the online mapquest site.  
continue onto the web2go screen.  
159  
       
Yelp: provides access to Yelp which is an online urban city guide that  
helps people find cool places to eat, shop, drink, relax and play. Its the  
fun and easy way to find, review and talk about what's great in your  
world.  
Note: If the Automatic brightness feature is enabled (Settings  
Display  
Brightness), you can not modify the browser’s brightness setting.  
• Refresh: reloads the current page.  
What’s Now: provides quick access to a variety of different  
entertainment and shopping websites.  
• Forward: forwards the browser to another web page.  
• More: displays the following additional options:  
My Account: provides quick access to your account information.  
Add bookmark: allows you to add a URL to your bookmark list.  
Navigating with the Browser  
Add shortcut to Home: adds a shortcut to your web2go homepage on  
your phone’s Home screen.  
1. To select an item, tap an entry.  
Add RSS feeds: adds RSS feeds to your browser.  
Find on page: allows you to search in the current page.  
Page info: displays information about the selected page.  
2. To scroll through a website, sweep the screen with your  
finger in an up or down motion.  
3. To return to the previous page, press  
.
Share page: allows you to share the page using Gmail or as a  
message.  
Browser Options  
1. From the home page, press  
Downloads: displays the download history.  
to access the following  
Settings: allows you to change the way you view your web pages by  
options:  
• New window: displays a new window so you can browse multiple  
URLs. For more information, refer to “Adding and Deleting  
Windows” on page 161.  
Entering a URL  
You can access a website quickly by entering the URL. Websites  
are optimized for viewing on your phone.  
• Windows: displays a list of the windows you have open.  
• Brightness setting: allows you to manually adjust the screen  
brightness.  
To enter a URL and go to a particular website:  
Tap the URL field at the top of the screen, enter the URL  
Connections 160  
           
and tap  
.
4. Scroll across the screen to view the currently active  
windows and tap an entry to launch the selected Internet  
window.  
Search the Internet  
To perform an internet search using keywords, follow these  
steps:  
5. Tap  
next to the listing to delete the window.  
1. Tap the Google search field, enter the keyword(s) to  
Using Bookmarks  
search using the on-screen keypad and tap  
While navigating a website, you can bookmark a site to quickly  
and easily access it at a future time. The URLs (website  
addresses) of the bookmarked sites display in the Bookmarks  
page. From the Bookmarks page you can also view your Most  
visited websites and view your History.  
(
Search). A list of search results displays.  
2. Tap a link to view the website.  
Adding and Deleting Windows  
You can have up to eight Internet windows open at one time. To  
add a new window, follow these steps:  
1. From the Home webpage, tap  
displays. Additional pages include Most visited and History  
2. Press to display the following options:  
. The Bookmarks page  
.
1. From your browser, press  
and then tap New window.  
– or –  
• Bookmark last-viewed page: Creates a new bookmark for the  
last webpage that you viewed.  
Press  
and then tap Windows  
New window.  
• List/Thumbnail view: Select Thumbnail view (default) to view a  
thumbnail of the webpage with the name listed, or select List view  
to view a list of the bookmarks with Name and URL listed.  
2. A new browser window displays.  
3. Press  
windows.  
and then tap Windows to see a list of all open  
• Create folder: Creates a new folder in which to store new  
bookmarks.  
3. Tap a bookmark to view the webpage, or touch and hold a  
Note: This icon will display a number that corresponds to the current number  
of active browser windows,  
bookmark for the following options:  
161  
   
• Open: Opens the webpage of the selected bookmark.  
you want to edit.  
• Open in new window: Opens the webpage in a new window.  
2. Tap Edit bookmark  
.
• Edit bookmark: Allows you to edit the name or URL of the  
3. Use the on-screen keypad to edit the name of the  
bookmark.  
bookmark or the URL.  
• Add shortcut to Home: Adds a shortcut to the bookmarked  
webpage to your phone’s Home screen.  
4. Tap OK  
.
• Share link: Allows you to share a URL address via Bluetooth,  
Facebook, Email, Gmail, or Messaging.  
Deleting Bookmarks  
1. From the Bookmarks page, touch and hold the bookmark  
you want to delete.  
• Copy link URL: Allows you to copy the URL address to use in a  
message.  
• Delete bookmark: Allows you to delete a bookmark.  
2. Tap Delete bookmark  
.
• Set as homepage: Sets the bookmark to your new homepage.  
3. At the confirmation window, tap OK  
.
Adding Bookmarks  
Emptying the Cookies  
1. From the Home webpage, tap  
Add.  
A cookie is a small file placed on your phone by a website during  
navigation. In addition to containing some site-specific  
information, a cookie can also contain some personal information  
(such as a username and password) which might pose a security  
risk if not properly managed. You can clear these cookies from  
your phone at any time.  
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the name of the  
bookmark and the URL.  
3. Assign a folder location. Home is the default.  
4. Tap OK. The new save page now appears on the  
Bookmarks page.  
1. From the Home webpage, press  
and then tap  
Editing Bookmarks  
More Settings Clear all cookie data.  
1. From the Bookmarks page, touch and hold the bookmark  
2. Tap OK to delete the cookies or tap Cancel to exit.  
Connections  
162  
             
Using Web History  
Browser Settings  
The History list displays a list of the most recently viewed  
websites. These entries can be used to return to previously  
unmarked web pages.  
To make configure browser settings:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Applications) ➔  
(Web).  
1. From the Home webpage, tap  
History tab.  
2. Press  
and then tap More  
Settings.  
A list of the most recently viewed websites displays.  
3. Choose from the following on-screen options:  
2. Tap an entry to display the webpage.  
• Default zoom: Adjusts the zoom feature. Set to Far, Medium, or  
Close.  
– or –  
• Open pages in overview: Displays an overview of recently viewed  
Press  
and then tap Clear history to delete the current  
web pages.  
History list.  
Text encoding: Adjusts the current text encoding.  
Using Most Visited  
• Block pop-up windows: Prevents popup advertisement or  
windows from appearing on-screen. Remove the checkmark to  
disable this function.  
The Most visited list provides you with a list of the most visited  
and bookmarked websites. These entries are used to return to  
previously unmarked web pages.  
• Loadimages: Allows web page images to load along with the other  
text components of a loaded website.  
1. From the Home webpage, tap  
Most visited tab.  
• Auto-fit pages: Allows web pages to be resized to fit as much of  
the screen as possible.  
A list of your most frequently visited webpages displays.  
The most frequently visited web pages display at the top of  
the list.  
• Landscape view only: Displays the browser in only the horizontal  
position.  
• Enable JavaScript: Enables javascript for the current Web page.  
Without this feature, some pages may not display properly. Remove  
the checkmark to disable this function.  
2. Tap any entry to display the selected webpage.  
163  
   
• Enable plug-ins: Allows the download of plug-ins such as Adobe  
Flash.  
• Remember passwords: Stores usernames and passwords for  
visited sites. Remove the checkmark to disable this function.  
• Open in background: New pages are launched in a separate page  
and displayed behind the current one. Remove the checkmark to  
disable this function.  
• Clear passwords: Deletes any previously stored usernames or  
passwords. Tap OK to complete the process.  
• Show security warnings: Notifies you if there is a security issue  
with the current website. Remove the checkmark to disable this  
function.  
• Set home page: Sets the current home page for the Web browser.  
• Default storage: Sets the default storage to Phone or  
Memory card.  
• Select search engine: Allows you to choose a default search  
engine for your phone. Choose from: Google Yahoo!, or Bing.  
,
• Clear cache: Deletes all currently cached data. Tap OK to complete  
the process.  
• Website settings: View advanced settings for individual websites.  
• Clear history: Clears the browser navigation history. Tap OK to  
complete the process.  
• Reset to default: Clears all browser data and resets all settings to  
default.  
• Accept cookies: Allows sites, that require cookies, to save and  
Bluetooth  
About Bluetooth  
read cookies from your device.  
• Clear all cookie data: Deletes all current browser cookie files.  
Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that  
allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth  
devices, such as headsets and hands-free car kits, and  
Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers, printers, and wireless  
devices. The Bluetooth communication range is usually up to  
approximately 30 feet.  
• Remember form data: Allows the device to store data from any  
previously filled out forms. Remove the checkmark to disable this  
function.  
• Clear form data: Deletes any stored data from previously filled out  
forms. Tap OK to complete the process.  
• Enable location: Allows websites to request access to your  
location.  
• Clear location access: Clears location access for all websites. Tap  
OK to complete the process.  
Connections  
164  
             
Turning Bluetooth On and Off  
Bluetooth Settings  
To turn Bluetooth on:  
The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of the  
characteristics of your device’s Bluetooth service, including:  
1. Press  
Wireless and network  
2. Tap the Bluetooth field to activate the feature (checkmark  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth  
communication and description  
Bluetooth settings  
.
Setting your device’s visibility (or “discoverability”) for other Bluetooth  
devices  
indicates active). When active,  
Status area.  
displays in the  
Displaying your device’s Bluetooth address  
To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:  
1. Press and then tap  
Wireless and network Bluetooth settings  
To turn Bluetooth off:  
1. Press  
Wireless and network  
(Settings) ➔  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
.
Bluetooth settings  
.
2. Verify Bluetooth is active. Indicated by a green check mark  
2. Tap the Bluetooth field to deactivate the feature.  
in the Bluetooth field.  
Bluetooth Status Indicators  
3. Tap the Device name Visible, Visible time-out, and Scan  
,
The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status  
at a glance:  
devices fields to set the options.  
Displays when Bluetooth is active.  
To change your Bluetooth name:  
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.  
Displays when Bluetooth is connected (paired) and  
communicating.  
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Device name  
.
3. Enter a new name.  
4. Tap OK to complete the rename process.  
165  
           
To set visibility:  
Note: Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one-time process. Once  
pairing is established the devices continue to recognize their  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
partnership and exchange information without entering a passcode.  
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Visible  
.
To pair your device with another Bluetooth device:  
Making your device visible allows other devices to pair and  
communicate.  
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.  
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Visible  
.
Note: From within the Visible timeout field, you can select a timeout valued  
from: 2 Minutes, 5 Minutes, 1 Hour, or Never. This value appears as a  
countdown within this field.  
Your device must be visible to successfully pair with an  
external device.  
To scan for Bluetooth devices:  
3. Tap Scan devices. Your device displays a list of discovered  
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.  
in-range Bluetooth devices.  
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Scan devices to  
search for visible external Bluetooth-compatible devices  
such as headsets, devices, printers, and computers.  
4. Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing.  
5. Enter the passkey or PIN code, if needed, and tap OK  
.
6. The external device must accept the connection and enter  
Pairing Bluetooth Devices  
your device’s PIN code.  
The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted  
connections between your device and another Bluetooth device.  
When you pair devices, they share a passkey, allowing for fast,  
secure connections while bypassing the discovery and  
authentication process.  
Once successfully paired to an external device,  
displays in the Status area.  
Note: Due to different specifications and features of other Bluetooth-  
compatible devices, display and operations may be different, and  
functions such as transfer or exchange may not be possible with all  
Bluetooth-compatible devices.  
Connections  
166  
         
Disconnecting a Paired Bluetooth Device  
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, touch and hold the  
name of the previously paired device (from the bottom of  
the page). This opens the connected device’s menu  
options.  
Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection between  
the device and your phone, but retains the knowledge of the  
pairing. At a later point when you wish to reconnect the device,  
there is no need to setup the connection information again.  
3. Tap Unpair to delete the paired device.  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
Sending Contacts via Bluetooth  
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, touch the previously  
Depending on your paired devices’ settings and capabilities, you  
may be able to send pictures, Contact information, or other items  
using a Bluetooth connection.  
paired device (from the bottom of the page).  
3. Tap OK to confirm disconnection.  
– or –  
Note: Prior to using this feature, Bluetooth must first be enabled on both your  
phone and the external device, and the recipient’s device must be  
visible.  
From the Bluetooth settings page, touch and hold the  
name of the previously paired device, and select  
Only a Contact’s information can be sent via Bluetooth. No other file  
type (video, image, or audio) can be sent using Bluetooth.  
Disconnect  
.
Note: Disconnections are manually done but often occur automatically if the  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active and your phone is visible.  
paired device goes out of range of your phone or it is powered off.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
(Contacts).  
Deleting a Paired Bluetooth Device  
3. Touch and hold the entry from the list to display the on-  
Deleting a device from your list removes its “connection record”  
and upon reconnection would require that you re-enter all the  
previous pairing information.  
screen context menu.  
4. Tap Send namecard via  
Bluetooth and select a paired  
external Bluetooth device.  
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.  
167  
       
PC Connections  
Note: The external Bluetooth device must be visible and communicating for  
the pairing to be successful.  
You can connect your device to a PC using an optional PC data  
cable using various USB connection modes. When you connect  
the device to a PC, you can synchronize files with Windows  
Media Player, and transfer data to and from your device directly.  
5. A Bluetooth share notification displays in your notifications  
list.  
Mass storage: allows you to use the onboard storage capacity of  
the device to store and upload files. This option allows your  
computer to detect the phone as a removable storage drive.  
Enable Downloading for Web Applications  
Important!: Before you can download a web application you must insert an  
SD into the phone and enable the Unknown sources feature  
Connecting as a Mass Storage Device  
You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and  
access the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the  
device, you can also access the files directory from the memory  
card by using the device as a memory card reader.  
1. Press  
Applications  
2. Tap the Unknown sources check box.  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
.
Note: The file directory of the memory card displays as a removable disk,  
separate from the internal memory.  
3. Tap OK to allow install of non-Market applications.  
Tap again to remove the checkmark and disable the  
installation of non-market applications.  
1. Insert a memory card into the device to transfer files from  
or to the memory card.  
Warning!: Not all web applications are safe to download. In order to protect  
your phone and data, use Android Market to install web  
Note: To use any downloaded market application that requires a USB  
connection between your phone and your PC, you should first set the  
USB setting to Mass storage  
.
Connections  
168  
       
2. Press  
Applications  
3. Press to return to Idle mode.  
and then tap  
(
Settings) ➔  
What is Kies Mini?  
USB settings Mass storage.  
Samsung Kies Mini is a software that enables you to update your  
device firmware by connecting to the PC.  
To learn more about Samsung Kies Mini and Samsung applications  
http://www.samsung.com/us/support/downloads  
:
4. Connect the multifunction jack on your device to a PC  
using an optional PC data cable.  
A pop-up window displays on the PC when connected.  
2. Navigate to the Software tab and download Kies Mini.  
5. Open the folder to view files.  
6. Copy files from the PC to the memory card.  
Important!: If you need any additional USB drivers, these can also be found  
within the phone’s Download Center  
>
Software tab.  
Using USB Debugging for Additional Connections  
Prior to using Kies for Phone Update  
The Application menu allows you to connect the phone to a PC,  
connect with Kies and synchronize files with Windows Media  
Player.  
Before using Kies to upgrade your device, it is recommended that  
you backup your personal data prior to use. For more  
Samsung Kies: connects your phone to a PC and prepares it for a  
direct firmware update.  
To export a Contact list to your microSD card:  
Media player: connects your phone to a PC in order to synchronize  
files with Windows Media Player.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
2. From the Contacts List, press  
and then tap  
USB debugging must be enabled before being able to use these  
Import/Export  
Export to SD card.  
3. Read the on-screen message and tap OK to choose all  
current phone contact entries and transfer them.  
169  
     
Verify your images and videos are on your microSD card:  
1. From the Home screen, tap Applications) ➔  
Gallery).  
5. Run Samsung Kies and follow the prompts to update your  
(
device firmware.  
(
6. Refer to Samsung Kies Help for more information.  
2. Verify the Gallery contains all of your pictures and videos.  
Synchronizing with Windows Media Player  
3. Remove the back cover and remove the internal microSD  
Ensure that Windows Media Player is installed on your PC.  
card prior to initiating a Kies Mini update.  
1. Press  
Applications  
2. Press the Home key to return to Idle mode.  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
USB settings Media player.  
Enabling USB Debugging  
1. Press  
and then tap  
Development  
(Settings) ➔  
Applications  
.
3. Using an optional PC data cable, connect the multifunction  
jack on your device to a PC with Windows Media Player  
installed.  
2. Tap the USB debugging field to verify the feature is active  
before connecting your USB cable.  
A pop-up window displays on the PC when connected.  
Connecting with Kies Mini  
4. Open Windows Media Player to synchronize music files.  
1. Install Samsung Kies Mini software on your PC.  
5. Edit or enter your device’s name in the pop-up window.  
2. Press  
Applications  
3. Verify USB debugging is active.  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
USB settings Samsung Kies.  
6. Select and drag the music files you want to the sync list  
and begin synchronizing.  
4. Using an optional PC data cable, connect the multifunction  
jack on your device to a PC.  
Connections  
170  
     
Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network  
Wi-Fi  
1. Press  
and then tap  
Wi-Fi settings  
(Settings) ➔  
About Wi-Fi  
Wireless and network  
.
Wi-Fi (short for "wireless fidelity") is a term used for certain  
types of Wireless Local Area Networks (WLAN). Wi-Fi  
communication requires access to an existing and accessible  
Wireless Access Point (WAP). These WAPs can either be Open  
(unsecured) as within most Hot Spots, or Secured (requiring  
knowledge of the Router name and password).  
The network names and security settings (Open network or  
Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi networks display in  
the Wi-Fi networks section.  
2. Tap the network you wish to connect to.  
Note: After you complete a connection to an active Wi-Fi network, the Wi-Fi  
Calling feature will automatically be enabled. For more information,  
Note: When you select an open network you are automatically connected.  
3. Enter a wireless password (if necessary).  
Activating Wi-Fi  
By default, your device’s Wi-Fi feature is turned off (deactivated).  
Activating Wi-Fi allows your device to discover and connect to  
compatible in-range WAPs (Wireless Access Points).  
1. Press  
and then tap  
Wi-Fi settings  
(Settings) ➔  
Wireless and network  
.
2. Tap Wi-Fi to activate the feature. A checkmark indicates  
that Wi-Fi is active. The device scans for available in-range  
wireless networks and displays them under Wi-Fi networks  
on the same screen.  
171  
       
Manually Add a New Network Connection  
1. Tap Add Wi-Fi network  
Deactivating Wi-Fi  
.
1. Press  
and then tap  
Wi-Fi settings  
(Settings) ➔  
Wireless and network  
.
2. Enter the Network SSID (the name of your Wireless Access  
Point).  
2. Tap the Wi-Fi field to deactivate the feature. The  
checkmark grays.  
3. Tap the Security field and select a security option. This  
must match the current security setting on your target  
WAP.  
Note: Use of wireless data connections such as Wi-Fi and Bluetooth can  
reduce battery life and use times.  
4. Enter your WAP’s password if the WAP is secure.  
Manually Scan for a Wi-Fi Network  
5. Tap Save to store the new information and connect to the  
1. Press  
Wireless and network  
2. Press and then tap Scanning  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
target WAP.  
Wi-Fi settings  
.
.
Note: No prompt to enter the WAP key displays if this is the second time to  
connect to a previously accessed or secured wireless network. The  
WAP key is required when the device is reset using factory default  
settings.  
Wi-Fi Status Indicators  
The following icons indicate the Wi-Fi connection status:  
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and  
communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP).  
Displays when Wi-Fi is active and there is an available  
open wireless network.  
Connections  
172  
       
Wi-Fi Advanced Settings  
2. Plug in the USB cable between your computer and your  
phone.  
The Wi-Fi settings - Advanced menu allows you to set up many of  
the device’s Wi-Fi services, including:  
3. When prompted for a USB mode, press  
to exit the  
Setting the Wi-Fi sleep policy  
menu.  
Viewing the device’s MAC Address  
Configuring use of either a DHCP or Static IP  
4. Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu. This places a  
green check mark next to the entry and activates the  
feature. A Tethering or Hotspot active notification briefly  
appears on the screen.  
To access the Wi-Fi Advanced Settings menu:  
1. Press and then tap  
Wireless and network Wi-Fi settings  
and then tap Advanced  
(Settings) ➔  
.
Look for the Tethering active icon  
area of the screen.  
in the Status bar  
2. Press  
.
Tethering  
To disconnect tethering:  
1. Press  
Wireless and network  
This option allows you to share your phone’s mobile data  
connection via a direct USB connection between your phone and  
computer. A wireless version of this same functionality would be  
the Mobile AP feature.  
and then tap  
(
Settings) ➔  
Tethering and portable hotspot.  
2. Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu to remove the  
check mark and deactivate the feature.  
Note: You can not mount your phone’s microSD card to your computer while  
using the USB tethering feature. If additional software or USB drivers  
are required, navigate to: http://www.samsung.com/us/support/  
3. Remove the USB cable from the phone.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Wireless and network  
Tethering and portable hotspot  
.
173  
           
Mobile AP  
Note: Using your 4G service and Mobile AP Hotspot drains your phone’s  
battery at a much faster rate than when using any other feature  
combination.  
This feature allows you to turn your phone into a Wi-Fi hotspot.  
The feature works best when used in conjunction with HSPA+  
(4G) data services (although 3G service can also be used).  
The best way to keep using the phone as a hotspot is to have it  
connected to a power supply.  
To connect to the Hotspot:  
Important!: The Mobile AP service can not be active at the same time as  
Wi-Fi. Please close your Wi-Fi connection prior to launching the  
Mobile AP service.  
1. Enable Wi-Fi (wireless) functionality on your target device  
(laptop, media device, etc.).  
To activate the Mobile AP service:  
2. Scan for Wi-Fi networks from the device and select your  
1. Press  
Wireless and network  
2. Tap Mobile AP settings  
and then tap  
Tethering and portable hotspot  
Mobile AP, this places a  
(Settings) ➔  
phone hotspot from the network list.  
.
Search for the name you gave your device within the Network SSID  
field.  
checkmark in the adjacent field to activate the service.  
You can later change the name by tapping Configure mobile AP  
Network SSID and changing the entry.  
3. Tap OK to continue with the activation.  
3. Select this Hotspot and follow your on-screen instructions  
4. Tap Configure mobile AP  
.
to complete the connection.  
5. Create a new Network SSID name and then write it down.  
4. Launch your Web browser to confirm you have an Internet  
6. Confirm the Mobile AP service icon  
appears at the  
connection.  
top of the screen.  
Note: By default, the connection is open and not secured. It is recommended  
that you access the Mobile AP settings and create a secure connection  
by using a password for communication.  
Connections  
174  
           
To secure the Mobile AP service:  
The two most common methods for securing your connection to  
the Hotspot are to a security method (WPA2 PSK) and to Hide  
your phone’s SSID name.  
1. Press  
Wireless and network  
Mobile AP settings  
2. Tap the Security field and select WPA2 PSK  
and then tap  
Tethering and portable hotspot  
Configure mobile AP  
(Settings) ➔  
.
.
3. With security enabled, enter a new password into the  
Password field.  
Important!: The more complex the password, the harder it will be for  
intruders to break your security. It is recommended that you not  
use names, birthdays, or  
4. Tap the Hide my device field to keep your phone from  
transmitting its Network SSID name.  
5. Tap Save to store the new settings.  
175  
   
Section 11: Time Management  
This section describes how you can manage time using time-  
related applications such as the Calendar, Alarm Clock, Analog or  
Digital clock, and the World clock.  
• Delete: allows you to delete All events, All events before today, or  
an individual event.  
• Settings: displays a list of configurable settings.  
Creating a Calendar Event  
Calendar  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Calendar).  
(Applications) ➔  
With the Calendar feature, you can consult the calendar by day,  
week, or month, create events, and set an alarm to act as a  
reminder.  
(
2. From the Month tab, press  
Create.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Applications) ➔  
Calendar Settings  
(
Calendar). The Calendar displays four tabs:  
Using the Calendar settings you can select the day with which  
you want the calendar to begin. You also select how you want to  
view the calendar, by Month, Week, or Day or determine how to  
manage events, notifications, sounds, and defaults reminders.  
• Month: displays the Month view.  
• Week: displays the Week view.  
• Day: displays the Day view.  
• List: allows you to search for events for the selected Month, Week,  
or Day. Or you can look for events for a future date.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press Settings  
(
Applications) ➔  
.
.
2. Press  
and select one of the following options:  
3. Tap Calendars and select the calendar categories you want  
to display or tap All calendars. A check mark indicates  
selection.  
• Search: allows you to search within your current events.  
• Create: creates a new Event.  
• Go to: displays a specific date.  
Today: displays the date highlighted with a Blue box highlighting  
the date.  
Time Management  
176  
         
4. Tap Calendar sync and select the type of general  
synchronization settings you want. A check mark indicates  
selection.  
Alarm and Clocks  
This feature allows you to create an alarm to ring at a specified  
time, track time in other parts of the world, use a stopwatch, or  
set a timer.  
5. Tap Default view and select a view: Month  
List  
6. Tap Day view and select a type: Time grid, or Event list  
7. Tap First day of week and select either Sunday or Monday  
,
Week, Day, or  
From the Home screen, tap  
Alarm & Clocks).  
(
Applications) ➔  
.
(
.
Setting an Alarm  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
(
Applications) ➔  
8. Tap Hide declined events to activate this option. A check  
(Alarm & Clocks).  
mark indicates selection.  
2. Tap  
(
Create alarm).  
9. Tap Lock time zone (to lock event time based on your  
current user-selected time zone). Select a time zone from  
within the Select time zone field.  
3. Use the plus or minus symbols to enter the hour, and  
minutes, then tap AM or PM (toggles depending on which  
was last selected).  
10. Tap Set alerts & notifications to adjust the event notification  
4. Tap the Alarm repeat field and touch the number of times  
method. Choose from: Alert  
Off  
11. Tap Vibrate to activate this notification option. Selections  
are: Always Only in Silent mode, or Never  
,
Status bar notification, and  
you want this alarm to repeat. Selections are: One-time  
.
event Daily, Every weekday(Mon-Fri), or Weekly. If you  
,
selected Weekly, a button row displays. Tap each day of  
the week in which you want this alarm to repeat, then tap  
,
.
12. Tap Select ringtone to assign a ringtone to a calendar event  
Save  
.
notification.  
5. Tap the Name field and enter a name for this Alarm.  
177  
       
6. Tap the radio button to activate a tone for one of the  
following alarm types: Snooze or Smart alarm  
7. Tap the Alarm type field and select one of the following:  
Melody Vibration Vibration and melody, or Voice  
To assign DST settings:  
.
1. Locate a desired city from the World Clock list.  
2. Touch and hold a city and select DST settings  
.
,
,
.
3. Select a DST setting (Automatic, Off, 1 hour or 2 hours).  
8. Tap the Alarm tone field and select one of the following:  
Sounds, or Go to My files. Locate a sound to use as an  
alarm ringtone then tap OK to activate the ringtone.  
Stopwatch  
This feature allows you to use a stopwatch to time multiple laps.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Applications) ➔  
9. Slide the slider bar left or right in the Alarm volume field to  
decrease or increase the alarm volume. A sample of the  
volume level plays.  
(
Alarm & Clocks) Stop watch tab.  
2. Tap Start to start the stopwatch counter.  
3. Tap Lap to begin the lap time counter.  
4. Tap Stop to stop the counter.  
World Clock  
This feature allows you to find out what time it is another part of  
world.  
5. Tap Restart to restart the lap counter. You can have  
multiple lap times.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Applications) ➔  
6. Tap Reset to reset the counter.  
.
2. Tap the World Clock tab.  
3. Tap  
(Add city) then scroll and select the desired city,  
or tap in the search field to locate a city.  
Time Management  
178  
           
Setting a Timer  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Applications) ➔  
(Alarm & Clocks) Timer tab.  
2. Tap the hr min, or sec field and use the on-screen keypad  
,
to enter the hour, minute, or seconds.  
3. Tap Start to start the timer.  
4. Tap Stop to stop the timer or Reset to reset the timer and  
start over.  
5. Tap Restart to resume the timer counter.  
179  
   
Section 12: Changing Your Settings  
Thissectionexplainsthesoundandphonesettingsforyourphone.  
It includes such settings as: display, security, memory, and any  
extra settings associated with your phone.  
Activating Wi-Fi  
1. Press  
and then tap  
Wi-Fi settings.  
(Settings) ➔  
Wireless and network  
Wireless and Networks  
Using Flight mode  
2. Tap Wi-Fi. A check mark displayed indicates Wi-Fi is  
active.  
Flight mode allows you to use many of your phone’s features,  
such as Camera, Games, and more, when you are in an airplane  
or in any other area where making or receiving calls or data is  
prohibited.  
Wi-Fi settings  
Once set up for Wi-Fi connectivity, your phone automatically uses  
Wi-Fi, when available, for all your mobile phone services.  
1. Press  
Wireless and network  
2. Configure the settings as desired.  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Important!: When your phone is in Airplane Mode, it cannot send or receive  
Wi-Fi settings  
.
any calls or access online information or applications.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
The available connection types displayed with a security type  
displayed next to them.  
Wireless and network  
.
2. Tap Flight mode. A check mark displayed next to the  
feature indicates Flight mode is active.  
Changing Your Settings  
180  
           
Network Notification  
WPS allows you to push buttons instead of entering a network  
name and wireless security PIN.  
By default, when Wi-Fi is on, you receive notifications in the  
Status bar anytime your phone detects an available Wi-Fi  
network. You can deactivate this feature if you do not want to  
receive notifications.  
1. Press  
Wireless and network  
2. Tap WPS button connection  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Wi-Fi settings  
.
.
1. Press  
and then tap  
Wi-Fi settings  
(Settings) ➔  
3. Press the WPS button on your Wi-Fi access point within 2  
Wireless and network  
.
minutes.  
2. Tap Network notification. A check mark displayed next to  
Manually Adding a Wi-Fi Network  
the feature indicates Network notification is active.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
Wi-Fi settings  
(Settings) ➔  
3. Tap Network notification again to remove the check mark  
Wireless and network  
.
and deactivate this feature.  
2. Tap Wi-Fi to turn it on.  
WPS Button Connection  
3. Tap Add Wi-Fi network  
.
The WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) button is a standard for easy  
and secure wireless network set up and connections. To use  
WPS, the connecting device must support WPS and be  
compatible with Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) security. WPS can  
automatically set up a random network name and WPA wireless  
security for wireless Wi-Fi phones, routers, access points,  
computers, adapters, and other electronic devices.  
4. Enter the SSID (Service Set Identifier) and Security settings  
then tap Save  
.
Note: An SSID is a unique key which identifies a wireless LAN. Its purpose is  
to stop other wireless equipment from accessing your LAN — whether  
accidentally or intentionally. To communicate, wireless devices must  
be configured with the same SSID.  
181  
Bluetooth settings  
Activating Visibility  
Press  
and then tap  
(
Settings) ➔  
In this menu you can activate Bluetooth, view or assign a device  
name, activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices can  
discover it, or scan for other, available Bluetooth devices with  
which to pair.  
Wireless and network  
Bluetooth settings  
Visible.  
The phone is now activated for discovery for 119 seconds  
so you can pair with another device. After 119 seconds the  
phone becomes undiscoverable again.  
Activating Bluetooth  
Press  
Wireless and network  
Bluetooth to turn it on.  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Scanning for Devices  
Bluetooth settings and tap  
This option allows you to scan for active Bluetooth devices so you  
can pair with them.  
1. Press  
Wireless and network  
Scan devices  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Note: Bluetooth must be enabled prior to use.  
Bluetooth settings  
Activating the Device Name  
.
1. Activate Bluetooth.  
Your phone begins scanning and lists any discovered  
devices in the Bluetooth devices section.  
2. Press  
Wireless and network  
The assigned device name displays.  
3. Press to erase the current device name and enter a  
new name for this device using the keyboard.  
4. Tap OK to confirm your setting.  
and then tap  
(
Settings) ➔  
Bluetooth settings  
Device name.  
2. Tap a device name to pair with the device.  
Important!: Some Bluetooth devices are secured and require a PIN number to  
confirm and pair with them.  
3. Enter a PIN to pair with the device, if one is required, and  
tap OK  
.
Changing Your Settings  
182  
Tethering  
To disconnect tethering:  
1. Press  
Wireless and network  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
This option allows you to share your phone’s mobile data  
connection via a direct USB connection between your phone and  
computer. A wireless version of this same functionality would be  
the Mobile AP feature.  
Tethering and portable hotspot  
.
2. Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu to remove the  
check mark and deactivate the feature.  
Note: You can not mount your phone’s microSD card to your computer while  
using the USB tethering feature. If additional software or USB drivers  
are required, navigate to: http://www.samsung.com/us/support/  
3. Remove the USB cable from the phone.  
VPN settings  
The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage Virtual  
Private Networks (VPNs).  
1. Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Wireless and network  
Tethering and portable hotspot  
.
Important!: Before you can use a VPN you must establish and configure one.  
2. Plug in the USB cable between your computer and your  
phone.  
Adding a VPN  
3. When prompted for a USB mode, press  
to exit the  
Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN protocol to  
use: PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol), L2TP (Layer 2  
Tunneling Protocol), L2TP/IPSec PSK (Pre-shared key based  
L2TP/IPSec), or L2TP/IPSec CRT (Certificate based L2TP/IPSec).  
menu.  
4. Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu. This places a  
green check mark next to the entry and activates the  
feature. A Tethering or Hotspot active notification briefly  
appears on the screen.  
1. Press  
Wireless and network  
2. Tap Add VPN  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
VPN settings  
.
.
Look for the Tethering active icon  
area of the screen.  
in the Status bar  
183  
           
To establish a PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol):  
To establish a L2TP/IPSec CRT (Certificate based L2TP/IPSec):  
1. Establish a VPN name (a name for this connection).  
1. Establish a VPN name (a name for this connection).  
2. Set the VPN server.  
2. Set the VPN server.  
3. Enable L2TP secret.  
4. Set L2TP secret.  
3. Enable encryption (if desired).  
4. Set the DNS search domains.  
5. Set user certificate. Note: A user certificate must be  
To establish a L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol):  
installed to use this setting.  
1. Establish a VPN name (a name for this connection).  
6. Set CA certificate. Note: A CA certificate must be installed  
2. Set the VPN server.  
3. Enable L2TP secret.  
4. Set L2TP secret.  
to use this setting.  
7. Set the DNS search domains.  
Mobile networks  
5. Set the DNS search domains.  
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your  
location or search for places of interest, you must enable the  
Mobile networks options.  
To establish a L2TP/IPSec PSK (Pre-shared key based L2TP/IPSec):  
1. Establish a VPN name (a name for this connection).  
2. Set the VPN server.  
Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
3. Set IPSEc pre-shared key.  
4. Enable L2TP secret.  
5. Set L2TP secret.  
Wireless and network  
Mobile networks.  
6. Set the DNS search domains.  
Changing Your Settings  
184  
 
Access Point Names  
The following options display:  
Use packet data  
To use Wi-Fi you need access to a wireless access point (hotspot):  
Allows you to activate data usage on your phone.  
Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Press  
Wireless and network  
Use packet data  
and then tap  
(
Settings) ➔  
Wireless and network  
Mobile networks  
Access Point  
Mobile networks  
Names. A list of the Access point names display. The active  
access point displays a bright green, filled circle to the  
right of the name.  
.
Data Roaming  
Network mode  
Data roaming allows you to connect to your service provider’s  
partner networks and access data services when you are out of  
your service providers area of coverage.  
You can configure your phone to either manually detect and use  
either a 2G (GSM) or 3G (WCDMA) data network connection.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Press  
Wireless and network  
mode  
and then tap  
(
Settings) ➔  
Wireless and network  
Mobile networks  
.
Mobile networks  
Network  
2. Tap Data roaming to connect to data services while  
roaming outside your network.  
– or –  
.
Tap Data roaming again to remove the green checkmark  
and deactivate the feature.  
185  
           
Using the 4G Network  
Note: Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer speed and time.  
To confirm you are always using the fastest possible connection,  
the phone has an automatic detection method where it finds both  
the fastest and most stable connection/communication method.  
This phone is capable of using either 4G/3G services for this  
connection.  
Using the 3G Network  
If you are using applications that require the 3G network speed,  
follow these instructions to connect to the 3G network.  
1. Press  
Wireless and network  
mode  
and then tap  
(
Settings) ➔  
1. Press  
Wireless and network  
mode  
and then tap  
(
Settings) ➔  
Mobile networks  
Network  
Mobile networks  
Network  
.
.
2. Tap WCDMA only. A check mark displays next to this option  
2. Tap GSM/WCDMA (auto mode). A check mark displays next  
to this option to indicate that it is active. This is the default  
mode for this phone.  
to indicate that it is active.  
Network Operators  
Using this feature you can view the current network connection.  
You can also scan and select a network operator manually, or set  
the network selection to Automatic.  
Using the 2G (EDGE) Network  
If you are not using applications that require the 3G network  
speed (any application that accesses the network or uses a  
browser), using the 2G network saves battery life.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Wireless and network  
Mobile networks  
.
1. Press  
Wireless and network  
mode  
and then tap  
(
Settings) ➔  
2. Tap Network operators. The current network connection  
Mobile networks  
Network  
displays at the bottom of the list.  
.
2. Tap GSM only. A check mark displays next to this option to  
Important!: You must deactivate data service prior to searching for an  
available network.  
indicate that it is active.  
Changing Your Settings  
186  
           
3. Tap Search now to manually search for a network.  
Call Settings  
To access the Call settings menu:  
4. Tap Select automatically to automatically select a network  
Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
connection.  
Call settings  
.
Note: Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer speed and time.  
– or –  
From the Home screen, tap  
Call settings  
Settings  
Default Setup Options  
.
Your phone default is set to Automatic (to automatically search  
for an available network. You can set this option to Manual to  
select a network each time you connect.  
Configuring General Call Settings  
Configure the general call settings using this option.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Settings  
settings All calls  
2. Tap one of the following options:  
1. Press  
Wireless and network  
operators  
2. Tap Default setup  
and then tap  
(
Settings) ➔  
Call  
Mobile networks  
Network  
.
.
.
• Show my number: allows you to select how your ID is handled  
when an outgoing call is initiated.  
3. Tap Manual to locate and connect to a network manually.  
– or –  
• Autoreject: sets the phone to automatically reject incoming calls or  
messages.  
Tap Automatic to allow the device to automatically select a  
• Answering call: selects how your phone answers incoming calls.  
Enable Answering mode, then select one of the following methods  
for answering the phone:  
network.  
Answering mode activates or deactivates the answering mode  
function.  
Answering key allows you to press a key to answer the phone.  
187  
         
Automatic answering automatically answers after a period of time.  
Selections are: Off, after 1 second, after 2 seconds, after 3 seconds,  
after 4 seconds, or after 5 seconds.  
Forward when busy: forwards all your calls to voicemail when your  
phone is busy.  
Forward when unanswered: automatically forwards to your  
voicemail number when the phone is not answered, and otherwise  
allows you to enter a voicemail number.  
• Prefix dialing: when activated, this feature automatically prepends  
a string of numbers (such as an area code) to any dialed number.  
This feature is useful for international dialing, or dialing within an  
area code where all the calls you make for a period of time use one  
Forward when unreachable: automatically forwards to your  
voicemail number when the phone is not in service, or is turned off.  
• Call barring: allows specified numbers to be barred from this  
phone.  
• Reject call with message: allows you to send a message  
immediately after rejecting a call.  
• Call waiting: enables call waiting functionality. When deactivated,  
all incoming calls are directed to your voicemail if you are already on  
an active call.  
• Call status tones: sets a tone to play for the following status tones:  
Call connect tone, Minute minder, or Call end tone. Touch each type  
of status tone you want to play.  
• Auto redial: automatically redial the dialed number if it is unable to  
connect or the call is cut off.  
• Outgoing call vibration: allows your phone to vibrate when the  
called party answers.  
• Noise suppression: to enable/disable noise suppression  
technology.  
• Alerts on call: activates an alert tone for new messages being  
received during an active call.  
Fixed Dialing Numbers  
Fixed Dial Number (FDN), allows you to restrict outgoing calls to a  
limited set of phone numbers.  
Configuring Voice Calls  
1. Press  
Call settings  
2. Tap one of the following options:  
• Call forwarding: configures call forwarding options:  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Enabling FDN  
Voice call  
.
1. Press  
Call settings  
2. Tap Enable FDN  
3. At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK  
Changing Your Settings  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Fixed Dialing Numbers.  
.
Always forward: incoming calls are re-routed to a secondary number  
that you specify.  
.
188  
               
Managing the FDN List  
Important!: Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card does not, this  
menu does not display.  
When this feature is enabled, you can make calls only to phone  
numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card.  
The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering an incorrect  
PIN2 code could cause the phone to lock. Contact customer  
service for assistance.  
1. Press  
Call settings  
2. Tap Enable FDN  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Fixed Dialing Numbers.  
Changing the PIN2 Code  
.
1. Press  
Call settings  
2. Tap Change PIN2  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
3. At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK  
.
Fixed Dialing Numbers.  
FDN is enabled.  
.
4. Tap FDN list then press  
and then tap Add contact or  
3. At the prompt, enter your old PIN2 code.  
4. At the prompt, enter a new PIN2 code.  
5. Confirm your PIN2 code.  
edit the contacts that were stored.  
Important!: Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card does not, this  
menu does not display.  
The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering an incorrect  
PIN2 code could cause the phone to lock. Contact customer  
service for assistance.  
Important!: Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card does not, this  
menu does not display.  
The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering an incorrect  
PIN2 code could cause the phone to lock. Contact customer  
service for assistance.  
Voicemail  
You can view your voicemail number from this menu.  
1. Press  
Call settings  
2. Tap Voicemail service and select My carrier  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Voicemail  
.
.
189  
3. Tap Voicemail to now view your number within the  
HAC Mode  
Voicemail number field.  
This menu is used to activate or deactivate Hearing Aid  
Compatibility for this device.  
TTY Mode  
1. Press  
and then tap  
HAC mode  
(Settings) ➔  
A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a  
telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf,  
hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities, to  
communicate by telephone.  
Call settings  
.
2. Tap On to activate the feature, or Off to deactivate the  
feature. Off is the default setting.  
Your phone is compatible with select TTY devices. Please check  
with the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure that it is  
compatible with digital cell phones.  
Drive Smart  
The DriveSmart application can be used to reduce distractions  
from your phone by silencing notifications, routing calls to  
voicemail and customizing auto responses to both callers and  
text message respondents notifying them that your driving.  
Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable that  
plugs into your phone’s headset jack. If this cable was not  
provided with your TTY device, contact your TTY device  
manufacturer to purchase the connector cable.  
Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
DriveSmart  
.
1. Press  
and then tap  
TTY mode  
(Settings) ➔  
Call settings  
.
Sound Settings  
2. Tap On to activate the feature, or Off to deactivate the  
From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone as well  
as configure the display settings.  
feature. Off is the default setting.  
Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) Sound.  
The following options display:  
Changing Your Settings  
190  
     
Silent mode  
Adjusting the Volume Settings  
Silent mode is convenient when you wish to stop the phone from  
making noise, in a theater for example. In Silent Mode the  
speaker is muted and the phone only vibrates to notify you of  
incoming calls, or other functions that normally have a defined  
tone or sound as an alert.  
The Volume menu now provides access to various volume  
settings within one on-screen popup menu.  
1. Press  
Volume  
and then tap  
(Settings) Sound  
.
2. Touch and drag the on-screen slider to assign the volume  
1. Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) Sound.  
settings for any of the following volume levels.  
2. Tap Silent mode  
.
• Incoming call volume  
,
Media volume, System volume, or  
– or –  
Notification volume  
.
From the Home screen, press and hold the Lock key until  
3. Tap OK to assign the volume levels.  
Phone options displays.  
Setup the Voice Call Ringtone  
3. Tap Silent mode to activate or deactivate this mode (the  
1. Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) Sound.  
current mode displays).  
2. Tap Phone ringtone  
.
Setup Phone Vibration  
3. Tap a ringtone from the available list. The ringtone briefly  
1. Press  
2. Tap Vibrate and select a vibration mode. Choose from:  
Always Never Only in silent mode, or Only when not in silent  
mode  
and then tap  
(Settings) Sound  
plays when selected.  
4. Tap OK to assign a ringer.  
,
,
Setting a Notification Ringtone  
.
1. Press  
Notification ringtone  
2. Tap one of the ringtones and tap OK  
and then tap  
(Settings) Sound  
.
.
191  
                   
Audible Tone Settings  
2. Tap Haptic feedback. A check mark displayed next to the  
feature indicates Haptic feedback  
is active.  
The Audible touch tones and Audible selection options are used  
when you use the dialing pad or making a screen selection. Each  
time you press a key or make a selection the selected tone  
sounds.  
3. Tap Vibration intensity then touch and drag the slider to  
adjust the vibration intensity, then touch OK  
.
1. Press  
and then tap  
(
Settings) Sound  
.
Display Settings  
2. Tap Audible touch tones or Audible selection. A check mark  
In this menu, you can change various settings for the display  
such as the font, orientation, pop-up notifications, puzzle lock  
feature, animation, brightness, screen timeout, power saving  
mode, and tv out settings.  
displayed next to these features indicates active status.  
Screen Lock Sounds  
The screen lock sounds option is used to activate/deactivate  
sounds when locking and unlocking the screen.  
Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Display. The following options display:  
1. Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) Sound  
.
• Wallpapers: assigns either the Home screen or Lock screen  
2. Tap Screen lock sounds. A check mark displayed next to  
wallpaper images.  
these features indicates active status.  
• Font style: sets the fonts used on the LCD display. Selections are:  
Default font, Choco cooky, Cool jazz, and Rosemary. Tap Get fonts  
online to download additional fonts.  
Haptic Feedback and Vibration Intensity  
Instead of sounding a tone, the Haptic feedback option vibrates  
when you press soft keys on certain screens. You can also set the  
intensity of the vibration using the Vibration intensity setting.  
• Brightness: configures the LCD Brightness levels. Tap Automatic  
brightness to allow the phone to self-adjust and tap OK  
.
• Auto-rotate screen: when enabled, the phone automatically  
switches from portrait to landscape orientation and vice versa.  
When this setting is disabled, the phone displays in portrait mode  
only.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) Sound.  
Changing Your Settings  
192  
             
• Puzzle lock: when selected puzzle pieces display on the lock  
screen for messages and missed calls. Slide the puzzle piece into  
the matching slot to view the message or missed call information.  
Connecting your Phone to the TV  
This feature allows you to connect your phone to your television  
(using an optional cable) and view any imaged stored on the  
phone and view it directly on your television.  
• Animation: determines whether some or all of the window  
elements animate. Selections are: No animations, Some  
animations, or All animations.  
Note: The TV system (NTSC) option is used if you are connecting to an older,  
• Screen timeout: adjusts the delay time before the screen  
automatically turns off. Selections are: 15 seconds, 30 seconds,  
1 minute, 2 minutes, and 10 minutes.  
analog NTSC system.  
To use the TV out feature:  
• Power saving mode: saves power because the phone analyzes the  
1. Press  
TV out  
2. Tap one of the following options:  
and then tap  
(Settings) Display  
displayed screen image and adjusts the LCD brightness.  
.
• TV out: connects your phone to your television (using an optional  
cable) and displays any image stored on the phone directly on your  
television.  
• TV out: to play all of the phone's video output through the TV-out  
feature.  
• Horizontal calibration: uses the accelerometer to calibrate the  
phone when held in a horizontal position.  
• TV system: to play the phone's video out through an analog TV  
video system converter (NTSC/PAL).  
Power Saving Mode  
This mode allows you to save power because the phone analyzes  
the displayed screen image and adjusts the LCD brightness.  
Note: NTSC is usually used in America.  
1. Press  
Display  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
.
2. Touch Power Saving mode to activate the feature. A check  
mark displayed next to the feature indicates Power Saving  
mode is active.  
193  
           
Horizontal Calibration  
Enabling the GPS Satellites  
1. Press  
and then tap  
.
(Settings) ➔  
Calibrate your phone by using the built-in accelerometer.  
Location and security  
1. Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) Display  
Horizontal calibration  
.
2. Tap Use GPS satellites enable the GPS satellite.  
2. Place the phone on a level surface and tap Calibrate. The  
phone adjusts the level of the accelerometer. During the  
calibration process a green circle appears on-screen and  
the center circle adjusts to the center position.  
Enabling the sensor aiding  
1. Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Location and Security  
2. Tap Use sensor aiding enhances positioning and save  
The Location and Security settings allow you to configure phone  
location and security settings.  
power while using the sensors.  
Using Wireless Networks  
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your  
location or search for places of interest, you must enable the Use  
wireless networks option or enable the GPS satellites.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
.
(Settings) ➔  
Location and security  
2. Tap Use wireless networks to enable location information  
using the wireless network.  
Changing Your Settings  
194  
                 
5. Draw your pattern by touching your first on-screen point.  
Then, without removing your finger from the screen, drag  
your finger over adjacent points until the gray trace line  
overlaps each point and they are highlighted with a green  
circle.  
Screen Unlock Pattern Settings  
To secure data and limit phone access, set the phone to require a  
screen unlock pattern each time you turn on the device, or every  
time the phone wakes up from sleep mode (when the screen  
automatically turns off).  
Setting an Unlock Pattern  
6. When you have connected at least four dots in a vertical,  
Creating a screen unlock pattern increases security on the  
phone. When you enable the User visible pattern field, you will  
draw an unlock pattern on the screen whenever you want to  
unlock the phone’s buttons or touch screen. When you activate  
the User tactile feedback field, you feel vibration as feedback  
while drawing the pattern.  
horizontal or diagonal direction, lift your finger from the  
screen and tap Continue  
.
7. Confirm the new pattern by redrawing it and then tapping  
Confirm. The Unlock pattern is set.  
Changing the Screen Lock Pattern  
Note: Make sure the Require Pattern field is activated.  
This feature allows you to change the previously stored unlock  
pattern and update it if necessary. This process is similar to  
changing your password from time to time.  
1. Press  
Location and security  
2. Tap Set screen lock  
3. Read the instructions then tap Next  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
.
1. Press  
and then tap  
.
(Settings) ➔  
Pattern.  
Location and security  
.
2. Tap Change screen lock  
.
4. Review the onscreen animation procedure for drawing a  
3. Retrace your current pattern on the screen.  
pattern and tap Next when you are ready to draw a pattern.  
4. Tap Pattern and repeat steps 4 - 7 from the previous  
section.  
195  
   
Using Visible a Pattern  
Password Lock and Unlock  
1. Press  
Location and security  
2. Tap Set screen lock  
3. Tap Password  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
When enabled, this feature displays the onscreen lock grid that is  
used to unlock the phone.  
.
Using Tactile Feedback  
.
When enabled, the User tactile feedback option, you will feel  
vibration as feedback while drawing the pattern.  
.
4. Enter a password using the keypad and tap Continue to  
PIN Lock and Unlock  
confirm the password.  
1. Press  
Location and security  
2. Tap Set screen lock  
3. Tap PIN  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
5. Confirm the password by re-entering it and tap OK to  
.
confirm.  
.
Setting up SIM Card Lock  
.
Prevent another user from using your SIM card to make  
unauthorized calls or from accessing information stored on your  
SIM card by protecting the information using a PIN code.  
4. Enter a PIN number using the numeric keypad and touch  
Continue to confirm the password.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
.
(Settings) ➔  
5. Confirm the PIN by re-entering it and tap OK to confirm.  
Location and security  
Your phone now requires you to enter this PIN number in  
order to unlock the phone.  
2. Tap Set up SIM card lock  
.
3. Tap Lock SIM card, enter your SIM PIN code, then touch OK  
.
Note: You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change your SIM PIN  
code.  
Changing Your Settings  
196  
   
To change an existing SIM Card PIN:  
4. Tap Change SIM PIN  
5. Enter the old SIM PIN code and tap OK  
6. Enter the new SIM PIN code and tap OK  
2. Tap Select device administrators to begin configuring this  
.
setting.  
.
3. Select an administrator device and follow the prompts.  
.
Credential Storage  
7. Re-type the new SIM PIN code and tap OK  
.
This option allows certain applications to access secure  
certificates and other credentials. Certificates and credentials  
can be installed to the SD card and password protected.  
Password Settings  
When you create a phone password you can also configure the  
phone to display the password as you type it instead of using an  
asterisk (*).  
1. Press  
and then tap  
.
(Settings) ➔  
Location and security  
2. Tap Use secure credentials to activate this feature. A check  
mark displayed next to the feature indicates secure  
credentials is active.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
.
(Settings) ➔  
Location and security  
2. Tap Visible passwords to activate this feature.  
3. Tap Install encrypted certificates to install encrypted  
Device Administration  
certificates from the memory (SD) card.  
Activating this feature allows Google to administrate your phone  
in a way similar to IT security settings on a corporate PC. This  
would be beneficial in the case that your phone was lost or  
stolen. The phone could be “deactivated” or “restricted” (through  
administration) from a remote location.  
4. Tap Set password to set or change the credential storage  
password.  
5. Tap Clear storage to clear the storage (SD card or phone  
memory) of all contents and reset the credentials  
password.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
.
(Settings) ➔  
Location and security  
197  
 
Managing Applications  
Applications  
This phone can be used for Android development. You can write  
applications in the SDK and install them on this device, then run  
the applications using the hardware, system, and network. This  
feature allows you to configure the device for development.  
This feature allows you to manage installed applications. You can  
view and control currently running services, or use the device for  
application development.  
You can also view the amount of memory or resources used as  
well as the remaining memory and resources for each of the  
applications on your phone and clear the data, cache, or defaults.  
Warning!: Android Dev Phones are not intended for non-developer end-  
users. Because the device can be configured with system  
software not provided by or supported by Google or any other  
company, end-users operate these devices at their own risk.  
Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Applications  
Manage applications.  
Unknown Sources  
Clearing Application Cache and Data  
Before you can download a web application you must enable the  
Unknown sources feature (enables downloading). Developers can  
use this option to install non-Market applications.  
Important!: You must have downloaded applications installed to use this  
feature.  
1. Press  
Applications  
2. Tap Unknown sources to active this feature.  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
1. Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
.
Applications  
Manage applications.  
2. Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data.  
3. Tap Clear cache Clear defaults Force stop, or Show all  
,
,
.
Changing Your Settings  
198  
     
Uninstalling Third-party Applications  
Moving Third-party Applications to your SD Card  
Your phone’s built in memory is augmented by using a microSD  
card to store additional data. When the phone’s built-in memory  
capacity is reached, it can be possible to move some applications  
over to the internal microSD card. Freeing up memory space on  
the phone can help avoid any sluggish performance when the  
phone has to work harder to manage memory resources.  
Important!: You must have downloaded applications installed to use this  
feature.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Applications  
Manage applications.  
2. Tap the Downloaded tab and select your desired  
Important!: Only certain downloaded applications are capable of being  
application.  
moved from phone to card.  
3. Tap Uninstall (from within the top area of the Application  
1. Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
info page).  
Applications  
Manage applications.  
4. At the prompt, tap OK to uninstall the application.  
2. Tap the Downloaded tab and select your desired  
5. Select a reason for uninstalling the application, then tap  
application.  
OK.  
3. Tap Move to USB storage (from within the Storage section  
of the Application info page).  
Once the application has been moved to the microSD card, this  
button now reads “Move to phone”.  
199  
       
Running Services  
Android Development  
Press and then tap  
Applications Development  
(Settings) ➔  
The Running services option allows you to view and control  
currently running services such as Backup, Google Talk, SNS  
(messaging), Swype, and more.  
.
1. Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Important!: These features are used for development purposes only.  
Applications  
Running services.  
USB Debugging  
The screen displays all the processes that are running.  
This feature is used for development purposes only.  
Allowing Mock Locations  
2. Tap a process to stop the process from running.  
When you stop the process the service or application will  
no longer run until you start the process or application  
again.  
This feature is used for development purposes only.  
If you are a developer who is testing a GPS applications using  
this device, you can tell the device that the phone is at different  
GPS locations. In other words, the phone is allowed to “mock”  
the coordinates.  
Important!: Stopping a process might have undesirable consequences on the  
application.  
Changing Your Settings  
200  
 
USB Settings  
Accounts and Synchronization  
This menu selects the method of communication for the USB  
port.  
Your phone provides the ability to synchronize data from a variety  
of different sources or sites. These accounts can range from  
Google, a Corporate Microsoft Exchange Email Server, and other  
social sites such as Facebook, Twitter, and MySpace. Corporate  
and Google accounts provide the ability to synchronize Calendar  
events and Contacts.  
Note: Before initiating a USB connection with the phone you must disable the  
Bluetooth feature, and/or USB debugging feature.  
1. Press  
Applications  
2. Select one of the following USB modes:  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
To enable the auto-sync feature:  
USB settings  
.
1. Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Accounts and sync  
.
• Samsung Kies: connects your phone to a PC and prepares it for a  
direct firmware update.  
2. Tap Auto-sync. A green checkmark indicates the feature is  
enabled. This feature enables the synchronization of data  
between your phone and external sites or servers.  
• Media player: connects your phone to a PC in order to synchronize  
files with Windows Media Player.  
• Mass storage: allows you to use the onboard storage capacity of  
the phone to store and upload files. This option allows your  
computer to detect the phone as a removable storage drive. For  
The three main components are Contacts Email, and Calendar  
Events. Before these can be synchronized, they must be added to  
the managed accounts list.  
• Background data: allows your phone to use data in the  
• Ask on connection: this default setting provides an on-screen  
prompt that allows you to choose from one of the above USB  
connection types once a direct USB connection is detected.  
background.  
201  
               
Synchronizing a Google Account  
To configure the Google management settings:  
1. Press and then tap  
Accounts and sync  
2. Tap within the Google account field to reveal the  
(Settings) ➔  
By default, there are no accounts managed by the device. These  
must be manually added.  
.
To manage an existing Google account  
1. Press and then tap  
Accounts and sync  
2. Tap Add account  
3. Tap Next Sign in  
:
(Settings) ➔  
account’s synchronization settings screen.  
.
3. Tap the parameters you wish to synchronize (Sync Books  
,
Google.  
Sync Contacts  
,
Sync Gmail, or Sync Calendar). A green  
checkmark indicates the feature is enabled.  
.
4. Press  
to return to the previous screen.  
Note: If you do not already have a Google account, tap Create and follow the  
on-screen prompts to create your new account.  
4. Touch the Username (@gmail.com) and Password fields  
and enter your information.  
5. Tap Sign in. Your phone then communicates with the  
Google servers to confirm your information. Your existing  
Gmail account then appears within the Manage accounts  
area of the screen.  
Any changes or updates to your Gmail account are then  
automatically updated to your device.  
Changing Your Settings  
202  
           
Synchronizing Your Corporate Account  
Privacy Settings  
By default, there are no Corporate Calendar events managed by  
the device. These must be manually added.  
Location settings, backup configurations, or reset the phone to  
erase all personal data.  
Press  
Privacy  
Mobile Backup and Restore  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Note: Once a corporate email account is created, it is automatically added as  
.
a managed account.  
Use the following procedure to configure your phone to  
synchronize with a corporate email account.  
The phone can be configured to back up your current settings,  
application data and settings.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Applications)Settings  
1. Press  
Privacy  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Accounts and sync  
.
.
– or –  
Press  
2. Tap Back up my data to create a backup of your current  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
phone settings and applications.  
Accounts and sync  
.
3. Tap Automatic restore to assist in the re-installation of a  
previously installed application (including preferences and  
data).  
2. Locate the email account containing the events you wish to  
synchronize.  
3. Tap  
within the adjacent account field to reveal the  
account’s synchronization settings screen.  
4. Toggle the check mark adjacent to either the Sync  
Contacts or Sync Calendar fields to manually sync the  
account.  
203  
             
Factory Data Reset  
Search Settings  
From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings to  
the factory default settings.  
You can use your phone's search preferences to configure some  
aspects of Google Web search (for example, whether it makes  
suggestions below the Quick Search Box as you type), and what  
phone features you want to include in searches.  
1. Press  
Privacy. (You will see a disclaimer.)  
2. Tap Factory data reset Reset phone.  
3. If necessary, enter your password and tap Erase  
everything  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
1. Press  
and then tap  
Search settings  
(Search).  
2. Press  
.
3. Tap any of the following search parameters to then alter  
.
the settings:  
The phone resets to the factory default settings  
automatically and when finished displays the Home  
screen.  
• Google search opens a screen where you can set your Google  
search preferences.  
Show web suggestions: includes search matches from Google’s  
online search engine.  
SD Card & Phone Storage  
From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the  
memory card as well as mount or unmount the SD card.  
Use My Location: uses your My Location information for Google  
search results and services.  
Search history: determines whether you also wish to included  
personalized search history results in the list of matches.  
For more information about mounting or unmounting the SD card,  
Manage search history: helps to manage the personalized search  
history associated with your current registered Google account.  
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:  
• Searchable items: opens a screen where you can choose the  
search categories included in device searches. such as: Web,  
Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
SD card and phone storage.The available memory  
displays under the Total space and Available space  
headings.  
Amazon Kindle, Apps  
,
Contacts  
,
Memo, Messaging, Music  
Player, Phone  
,
Slacker, or Voice Search  
.
Changing Your Settings  
204  
       
• Clear shortcuts: erases the history for recently selected search  
Swype Settings  
results.  
Language & Keyboard Settings  
This setting allows you to configure the language in which to  
display the menus. You can also set on-screen keyboard options.  
1. Press  
and text  
and then tap  
(Settings) Locale  
Swype.  
2. Tap one of the following Swype preferences to activate the  
Press  
Locale and text  
Language Settings  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
setting:  
.
• Language: allows you to select the current text input language.  
Default language is US English.  
To set the language that the menus display on the phone:  
1. Press and then tap Settings) Locale  
and text Select locale  
• Audio feedback: turns off sounds generated by the Swype  
application.  
(
• Vibrate on keypress: activates a vibration sensation as you enter  
text using the keypad.  
.
2. Select a language and region from the list.  
• Show tips: turns on an on-screen flashing indicator that provides  
helpful user information.  
Select Input Method  
There are two input methods available: Swype and Samsung  
keypad.  
1. Press  
and text  
2. Select an input method.  
and then tap  
(Settings) Locale  
Select input method  
.
205  
       
Swype Advanced settings  
Tutorial: provides an on-screen tutorial that shows you how to input  
text faster in Swype input mode.  
Advanced settings provide access to Swype operation  
parameters.  
About  
Provides information about the current Swype application  
version.  
• Word suggestion: uses a built-in word database to predict words  
while entering text in Swype.  
• Auto-spacing: automatically inserts a space between words.  
When you finish a word, just lift your finger or stylus and start the  
next word.  
Samsung Keyboard Settings  
• Auto-capitalization: automatically capitalizes the first letter of a  
sentence.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
• Show complete trace: determines whether or not to display the  
Locale and text  
Samsung keypad.  
complete Swype trace path on-screen.  
2. Tap Portrait Keypad types and select a text input method:  
• Speed vs. accuracy: sets how quickly Swype responds to  
on-screen input. Move the slider between Fast Response (speed) or  
Qwerty Keypad  
3x4 Keypad  
Error Tolerant (accuracy) and tap OK  
.
• Personal dictionary: allows you to manage your personal  
dictionary.  
3. Tap Input languages and select a language.  
4. Tap XT9 to use XT9 Predictive text method. For more  
• Reset Swype’s dictionary: allows you to reset the entries from  
your Swype dictionary.  
Swype Help settings  
Help settings provide access to Swype help operation  
parameters.  
5. Tap the Keypad sweeping field if you want to sweep the  
keypad and change from ABC to ?123 mode. For more  
• Swype help: displays the on-screen Swype User Manual.  
Changing Your Settings  
206  
       
6. Tap the Auto-capitalization field to automatically capitalize  
4. Tap the Spell correction field. This option corrects  
typographical errors by selecting from a list of possible  
words that reflect the characters of the keys you touched  
as well as the characters of nearby keys.  
the first letter of a sentence.  
7. Tap Voice input to activate the Voice input feature. This is  
an experimental feature that uses Google’s networked  
speech recognition application.  
5. Tap the Next word prediction field to enable word  
prediction.  
8. Tap Auto-full stop to automatically insert a full stop by  
tapping the space bar twice.  
6. Tap the Auto-append field to automatically add predictions.  
9. Tap the Tutorial field to view a short tutorial on use of the  
7. Tap the Auto-substitution field to automatically replace  
words that you are typing. This option assists with  
correcting misspelled words.  
Samsung keyboard.  
XT9 Advanced Settings  
8. Tap the Regional correction field. This option sets the  
device to automatically correct mistyped words according  
to normal spelling for your region.  
The following XT9 Advanced settings are available when the XT9  
field is selected.  
1. Tap the XT9 field to select XT9 (predictive text) mode, then  
tap XT9 advanced settings  
.
9. Tap the Recapture field. This option sets the device to  
re-display the word suggestion list when you select the  
wrong word from the list.  
2. Tap the Word completion field to enable word completion.  
Your phone predicts how to complete the word typed.  
10. To add a new word to the T9 dictionary:  
3. Tap the Word completion point field then tap 2 letters  
,
Tap the XT9 my words field, then press  
Add. Enter the new word in the Register to XT9 my words  
field, then tap Done  
and then tap  
3 letters 4 letters, or the 5 letters radio button. Word  
,
completion begins after 2 or more (depending on your  
selection).  
.
207  
   
11. Tap XT9 auto-substitution to add words to substitute (for  
example youve becomes you’ve). A list of substitutions  
displays.  
• Block offensive words: allows you to block recognition of known  
offensive words or language. (A green check mark indicates the  
feature is active).  
• Personalized recognition: improves the accuracy of the speech  
recognition functionality.  
12. If you do not see the substitution you want, press  
then tap Add, then input the Shortcut word and  
Substitution word.  
and  
• Google Account dashboard: allows you to manage your collected  
Google data online. You will be asked to provide your login  
information.  
13. Tap Done  
.
3. Press  
to return to the previous screen.  
Voice Input and Output Settings  
Configuring Text-to-speech  
Configuring Voice Input Recognition  
This feature allows the phone to provide a verbal readout of  
on-screen data such as messages and incoming caller  
information.  
This feature allows the phone to correctly recognize verbal input.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
1. Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Voice input and output  
Voice recognition settings  
.
Voice input and output  
Text-to-speech settings  
.
2. Configure the available options to alter the settings  
2. Configure the available options to alter the settings  
associated with this feature:  
associated with this feature:  
• Language: selects an input language and associated dialect  
recognition (if available).  
• Listen to an example: plays a short example of what the text-to-  
speech feature sounds like on your device when activated.  
• SafeSearch: sets the explicit image filter settings. These settings  
apply to only Google voice search results. Choose from: Off  
,
• Driving mode: incoming calls and new notifications are  
automatically ready out loud.  
Moderate, or Strict  
.
Changing Your Settings  
208  
     
• Always use my settings: accepts an override of application  
settings with personal configurations for this text-to-speech settings  
screen. If enabled, your device defaults to using the text-to-speech  
feature.  
2. Tap Accessibility to activate the feature, then select the  
services for which you want data to log.  
Note: The  
(power key) ends all calls.  
• Default engine: sets the speech synthesis engine that will be used  
for the spoken text. Choices include: Pico TTS  
.
Date and Time  
This menu allows you to change the current time and date  
displayed.  
• Install voice data: confirms the installation of necessary data  
required for voice synthesis.  
• Speech rate: adjusts the rate at which on-screen text is spoken by  
the device. Choose from: Very slow  
,
Slow, Normal, Fast, and Very  
1. Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
fast.  
Date and time  
.
• Language: assigns the language used for verbal readout. Choose  
from American English or Spanish.  
2. Tap Automatic to allow the network set the date and time.  
• Pico TTS: configures the pico TTS settings for various languages.  
Important!: Deactivate Automatic to manually set the rest of the options.  
Accessibility Settings  
3. Tap Set date and use the plus or minus icons to set the  
This service is able to collect all the text you type, including  
personal data credit card numbers except passwords. It may also  
log your user interface interactions. It comes from the  
applications such as KickBack, SoundBack, and TalkBack.  
Month Day, and Year then touch Set.  
,
4. Tap Select time zone, then tap a time zone.  
5. Tap Set time and use the plus or minus icons, set Hour, and  
1. Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Minute. Tap PM or AM, then tap Set  
.
Accessibility  
.
Optional: Touch Use 24-hour format. If this is not selected the  
phone automatically uses a 12-hour format.  
Note: Initially, it might be necessary to download accessibility applications  
from the Android Market.  
6. Tap Select date format and tap the date format type.  
209  
     
About Phone  
• System tutorial: provides a quick, online tutorial that walks you  
through basic phone features. Read the on-screen information and  
follow the system prompts.  
This menu contains legal information, system tutorial  
information, and other phone information such as the model  
number, firmware version, baseband version, kernel version, and  
software build number.  
• Model number: displays the phone’s model number.  
• Firmware version: displays the firmware version loaded on this  
handset.  
To access phone information:  
• Baseband version: displays the baseband version loaded on this  
handset.  
Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) About  
phone. The following information displays:  
• Kernel version: displays the kernel version loaded on this handset.  
• Build number: displays the software, build number.  
• Status: displays the Battery status, the Battery Level (percentage),  
the Phone number for this device, the Network connection, Signal  
strength, Mobile network type, Service state, Roaming status,  
Mobile network state, IMEI number, IMEI SV, Wi-Fi MAC address,  
Bluetooth address, and Up time.  
Note: Firmware, baseband, kernel and build numbers are usually used for  
updates to the handset or support. For additional information please  
contact your T-Mobile service representative.  
• Battery use: displays the applications or services (in percentages)  
that are using battery power.  
Software Update  
The Software Update feature enables you to use your phone to  
connect to the network and upload any new phone software  
directly to your phone. The phone automatically updates with the  
latest available software when you access this option.  
• Legal information: This option displays information about Open  
source licenses, License settings, as well as Google legal  
information. This information clearly provides copyright and  
distribution legal information and facts as well as Google Terms of  
Service, Terms of Service for Android-powered Phones, and much  
more pertinent information as a reference.  
Press  
and then tap  
(Settings) ➔  
Software update  
.
Read the information and terms, then press BACK to return to the  
Settings menu.  
The phone automatically updates the software (if  
available).  
Changing Your Settings  
210  
 
Section 13: Health and Safety Information  
This section outlines the safety precautions associated with using  
your phone. The terms “mobile device” or “cell phone” are used  
in this section to refer to your phone. Read this information before  
The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the  
microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at substantially  
reduced time intervals when in the stand-by mode. Whereas high  
levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue),  
exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects  
causes no known adverse health effects.  
using your mobile device  
.
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals  
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published  
information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF)  
exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication includes the  
following information:  
The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not be  
confused with the effects from other types of electromagnetic  
energy.  
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found in X-  
rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues. Ionization is  
a process where electrons are stripped away from their normal  
locations in atoms and molecules. It can permanently damage  
biological tissues including DNA, the genetic material.  
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?  
Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will cause  
cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of scientific  
evidence has not linked cell phones with any health problems.  
Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy. Over  
the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds of studies  
looking at the biological effects of the radio frequency energy  
emitted by cell phones. While some researchers have reported  
biological changes associated with RF energy, these studies have  
failed to be replicated. The majority of studies published have  
failed to show an association between exposure to radio  
frequency from a cell phone and health problems.  
The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy,  
including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great  
enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules. Therefore,  
RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation. Other types of non-  
ionizing radiation include visible light, infrared radiation (heat),  
and other forms of electromagnetic radiation with relatively low  
frequencies.  
211  
         
While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can  
increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two  
areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly  
vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little blood  
flow in them to carry away excess heat.  
Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused brain  
cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk of brain  
cancer from using cell phones. For people with the heaviest use  
of cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour per day, every  
day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a slight increase in  
brain cancer. However, the authors determined that biases and  
errors prevented any conclusions being drawn from this data.  
Additional information about Interphone can be found at  
Research Results to Date: Is there a connection between  
RF and certain health problems?  
The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In addition,  
attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies that have  
shown a connection have failed.  
Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did not  
answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional research  
is being conducted around the world, and the FDA continues to  
monitor developments in this field.  
The scientific community at large therefore believes that the  
weight of scientific evidence does not show an association  
between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones and  
adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community has  
supported additional research to address gaps in knowledge.  
Some of these studies are described below.  
International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users (COSMOS)  
The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health monitoring  
of a large group of people to determine if there are any health  
issues linked to long-term exposure to radio frequency energy  
from cell phone use. The COSMOS study will follow  
Interphone Study  
Interphone is a large international study designed to determine  
whether cell phones increase the risk of head and neck cancer. A  
report published in the International Journal of Epidemiology  
(June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for more than 5,000  
people with brain tumors (glioma and meningioma) and a similar  
number of healthy controls.  
approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in Europe for 20 to  
30 years. Additional information about the COSMOS study can be  
.
Health and Safety Information  
212  
RiskofBrainCancerfromExposuretoRadioFrequencyFields  
in Childhood and Adolescence (MOBI-KIDS)  
Cell Phone Industry Actions  
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory  
actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry to take a  
number of steps, including the following:  
MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the relationship  
between exposure to radio frequency energy from  
communication technologies including cell phones and brain  
cancer in young people. This is an international multi-center  
study involving 14 European and non-European countries.  
Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be found at  
Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF for  
the type of signal emitted by cell phones;  
Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the  
user; and  
Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current  
information on cell phone use and human health concerns.  
Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER) Program  
of the National Cancer Institute  
The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting bodies  
such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers  
(IEEE), the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation  
Protection (ICNIRP), and others to assure that safety standards  
continue to adequately protect the public.  
statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of  
new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk for  
brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell phone use  
has been common for quite some time in the U.S. Between 1987  
and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence of brain cancer did  
not increase. Additional information about SEER can be found at  
http://seer.cancer.gov/  
.
213  
Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other  
Accessories  
Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy  
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions  
from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that hands-free  
kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for convenience  
and comfort. They are also required by law in many states if you  
want to use your phone while driving.  
If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency energy  
(RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not know that  
there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are concerned  
about avoiding even potential risks, you can take a few simple  
steps to minimize your RF exposure.  
Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head from  
RF Radiation  
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions  
from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that accessories  
which claim to shield the head from those emissions reduce  
risks. Some products that claim to shield the user from RF  
absorption use special phone cases, while others involve nothing  
more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone. Studies  
have shown that these products generally do not work as  
advertised. Unlike “hands-free” kits, these so-called “shields”  
may interfere with proper operation of the phone. The phone may  
be forced to boost its power to compensate, leading to an  
increase in RF absorption.  
Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;  
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between your  
head and the cell phone.  
Hands-Free Kits  
Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets and  
various types of body-worn accessories such as belt-clips and  
holsters. Combinations of these can be used to reduce RF energy  
absorption from cell phones.  
Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the phone  
is held away from the head in the user's hand or in approved  
body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in the U.S. are  
required to meet RF exposure compliance requirements when  
used against the head and against the body.  
Children and Cell Phones  
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users of  
cell phones from RF exposure, including children and teenagers.  
The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure apply to  
children and teenagers as well.  
Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;  
Health and Safety Information  
214  
   
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between the  
head and the cell phone.  
World Health Organization (WHO):  
International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:  
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have  
advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones at  
all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United Kingdom  
made such a recommendation in December 2000. In this report,  
a group of independent experts noted that no evidence exists that  
using a cell phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects. Their  
recommendation to limit cell phone use by children was strictly  
precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that any  
health hazard exists.  
Health Protection Agency:  
US Food and Drug Administration:  
http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/  
RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification  
Information  
Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is  
designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure limits for  
Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications  
Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government.  
Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from various  
sources can be obtained from the following organizations  
(updated 10/1/2010):  
FCC RF Safety Program:  
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):  
These FCC exposure limits are derived from the  
recommendations of two expert organizations: the National  
Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP) and  
the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).  
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):  
(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)  
In both cases, the recommendations were developed by scientific  
and engineering experts drawn from industry, government, and  
academia after extensive reviews of the scientific literature  
related to the biological effects of RF energy.  
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):  
215  
   
The exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile phones  
employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific  
Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the rate of  
absorption of RF energy by the human body expressed in units of  
watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC requires wireless phones to  
comply with a safety limit of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).  
For body-worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets  
FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory that  
contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a  
minimum of 1.0 cm from the body.  
Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF  
exposure guidelines.  
The FCC exposure limit incorporates a substantial margin of  
safety to give additional protection to the public and to account  
for any variations in measurements.  
The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this mobile  
phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance  
with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. The maximum SAR values  
for this model phone as reported in the FCC equipment  
authorization grant is:  
SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions  
accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest  
certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the  
SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual  
SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the  
maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to  
operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power  
required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a  
wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output.  
Head: 0.90 W/Kg.  
Body-worn: 1.23 W/Kg.  
2.4GHz WLAN  
Head: 0.11 W/Kg.  
Body-worn: 0.12 W/Kg.  
SAR information on this and other model phones can be viewed  
online at http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea. To find information that  
pertains to a particular model phone, this site uses the phone  
FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the case  
of the phone.  
Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public, it  
must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed  
the exposure limit established by the FCC. Tests for each model  
phone are performed in positions and locations (e.g. at the ear  
and worn on the body) as required by the FCC.  
Sometimes it may be necessary to remove the battery pack to  
find the number. Once you have the FCC ID number for a  
Health and Safety Information  
216  
particular phone, follow the instructions on the website and it  
should provide values for typical or maximum SAR for a particular  
phone. Additional product specific SAR information can also be  
the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct  
the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
.
-Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
FCC Part 15 Information to User:  
Pursuant to part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, you are cautioned that  
changes or modifications not expressly approved by Samsung  
could void your authority to operate the device.  
-Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from  
that to which the receiver is connected.  
-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for  
help.  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is  
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not  
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any  
interference received, including interference that may cause  
undesired operation.  
Smart Practices While Driving  
On the Road - Off the Phone  
The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe operation of  
his or her vehicle.  
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with  
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference in a residential  
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate  
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular  
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to  
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning  
Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task should be  
performed while driving whether it be eating, drinking, talking to  
passengers, or talking on a mobile phone - unless the driver has  
assessed the driving conditions and is confident that the  
secondary task will not interfere with their primary responsibility.  
Do not engage in any activity while driving a moving vehicle which  
may cause you to take your eyes off the road or become so  
absorbed in the activity that your ability to concentrate on the act  
of driving becomes impaired. Samsung is committed to promoting  
responsible driving and giving drivers the tools they need to  
understand and address distractions.  
217  
       
Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices and  
their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always obey them.  
The use of these devices may be prohibited or restricted in certain  
areas. For example, only hands-free use may be permitted in  
certain areas.  
automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or  
ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in an  
automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could result  
in fines, penalties, or other damages.  
Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the  
driver's clear view of the street and traffic.  
Before answering calls, consider your circumstances. Let the call  
go to voicemail when driving conditions require. Remember,  
driving comes first, not the call!  
Never use wireless data services such as text messaging, Web  
browsing, or e-mail while operating a vehicle.  
If you consider a call necessary and appropriate, follow these  
tips:  
Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video games  
while operating a vehicle.  
Use a hands-free device;  
For more information, go to http://www.ctia.org  
.
Secure your phone within easy reach;  
Place calls when you are not moving;  
Plan calls when your car will be stationary;  
Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;  
Battery Use and Safety  
Important!: Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or damage  
.
Most battery issues arise from improper handling of batteries  
and, particularly, from the continued use of damaged batteries.  
Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are driving  
and will suspend the call if necessary;  
Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise attempt  
to change the form of your battery. Do not put a high degree of  
pressure on the battery. This can cause leakage or an internal short-  
circuit, resulting in overheating.  
Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving;  
Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in an  
automobile:  
Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or  
near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law  
may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in the  
Health and Safety Information  
218  
   
Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids.  
Liquids can get into the phone's circuits, leading to corrosion. Even  
when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate normally,  
the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety hazard. If the  
phone and/or battery get wet, have them checked by your service  
provider or contact Samsung, even if they appear to be working  
properly.  
Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects. Accidental  
short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, key, jewelry,  
clip, or pen) causes a direct connection between the + and - terminals  
of the battery (metal strips on the battery), for example when you carry  
a spare battery in a pocket or bag. Short-circuiting the terminals may  
damage the battery or the object causing the short-circuiting.  
Important!: Important: Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and recharge  
your battery only with Samsung-approved chargers which are  
specifically designed for your phone.  
Do not place your battery in or near a heat source. Excessive  
heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the  
phone or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery with  
an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven, hair dryer,  
iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your phone in your car in high  
temperatures.  
Warning!: Warning: Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may  
present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard  
.
Samsung's warranty does not cover damage to the phone caused  
by non-Samsung-approved batteries and/or chargers.  
Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire. The phone or  
the battery may explode when overheated.  
Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers. Some  
websites and second-hand dealers not associated with reputable  
manufacturers and carriers, might be selling incompatible or even  
counterfeit batteries and chargers. Consumers should purchase  
manufacturer or carrier-recommended products and accessories. If  
unsure about whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible,  
contact the manufacturer of the battery or charger.  
Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery. Do not let leaking  
battery fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing. For safe  
disposal options, contact your nearest Samsung-authorized service  
center.  
Avoid dropping the cell phone. Dropping the phone or the battery,  
especially on a hard surface, can potentially cause damage to the  
phone and battery. If you suspect damage to the phone or battery, take  
it to a service center for inspection.  
Misuse or use of incompatible phones, batteries, and charging  
devices could result in damage to the equipment and a possible  
risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to serious injuries,  
Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way  
.
damages to your phone, or other serious hazard  
.
219  
regarding specific locations may be found at:  
Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling  
Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its  
customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine  
Samsung accessories.  
.
Mail It In  
The Samsung Mobile Take-Back Program will provide  
Samsung customers with a free recycling mailing label. Just  
go to  
Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not only  
important for safety, it benefits the environment. Batteries must  
be recycled or disposed of properly.  
ecyle_your_phone_page and follow the instructions to print out  
a free pre-paid postage label and then send your old mobile  
device or battery to the address listed, via U.S. Mail, for  
recycling.  
Recycling programs for your mobile device, batteries, and  
accessories may not be available in your area.  
We've made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung mobile  
device by working with respected take-back companies in every  
state in the country.  
Drop It Off  
Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved  
recycler.  
You can drop off your Samsung-branded mobile device and  
batteries for recycling at one of our numerous Samsung  
Recycling Direct (SM) locations. A list of these locations may  
To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website:  
Or call, (877) 278-0799.  
.
Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile devices  
and batteries  
Samsung-branded devices and batteries will be accepted at  
these locations for no fee.  
Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance with  
local regulations. In some areas, the disposal of these items in  
Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or  
batteries at many retail or carrier-provided locations where  
mobile devices and batteries are sold. Additional information  
Health and Safety Information  
220  
   
household or business trash may be prohibited. Help us protect  
the environment - recycle!  
Display / Touch-Screen  
Please note the following information when using your mobile  
device:  
Warning!: Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may explode.  
WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY  
UL Certified Travel Charger  
The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL safety  
requirements. Please adhere to the following safety instructions  
per UL guidelines:  
The display on your mobile device is made of glass or  
acrylic and could break if your mobile device is dropped or  
if it receives significant impact. Do not use if screen is  
broken or cracked as this could cause injury to you.  
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY  
LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE  
PROPERTY DAMAGE.  
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A TOUCH-SCREEN  
MOBILE DEVICE  
If your mobile device has a touch-screen display, please  
note that a touch-screen responds best to a light touch  
from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using  
excessive force or a metallic object when pressing on the  
touch-screen may damage the tempered glass surface  
and void the warranty. For more information, please refer  
to the “Standard Limited Warranty” on page 232.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE  
INSTRUCTIONS.  
DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC  
SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.  
FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH  
AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR OF  
THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE POWER  
OUTLET.  
THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE CORRECTLY  
ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR  
MOUNT POSITION.  
221  
       
applications providers, Samsung, and other third-parties  
providing services.  
GPS & AGPS  
Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning  
System (GPS) signal for location-based applications. A GPS uses  
satellites controlled by the U.S. Government that are subject to  
changes implemented in accordance with the Department of  
Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio navigation Plan (FRP).  
Changes may affect the performance of location-based  
technology on your mobile device.  
Use of AGPS in Emergency Calls  
When you make an emergency call, the cellular network may  
activate AGPS technology in your mobile device to tell the  
emergency responders your approximate location.  
AGPS has limitations and might not work in your area. Therefore:  
Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of your  
ability; and  
Certain Samsung mobile devices can also use an Assisted Global  
Positioning System (AGPS), which obtains information from the  
cellular network to improve GPS performance. AGPS uses your  
wireless service provider's network and therefore airtime, data  
charges, and/or additional charges may apply in accordance with  
your service plan. Contact your wireless service provider for  
details.  
Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency responder  
instructs you.  
Navigation  
Maps, directions, and other navigation data may contain  
inaccurate or incomplete data, and circumstances can and do  
change over time. In some areas, complete information may not  
be available. Therefore, you should always visually confirm that  
the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see  
before following them. All users should pay attention to road  
conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may impact  
Your Location  
Location-based information includes information that can be  
used to determine the approximate location of a mobile device.  
Mobile devices which are connected to a wireless network  
transmit location-based information. Additionally, if you use  
applications that require location-based information (e.g. driving  
directions), such applications transmit location-based  
safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs  
.
information. The location-based information may be shared with  
third-parties, including your wireless service provider,  
Health and Safety Information  
222  
   
If certain features are in use (call blocking, for example), you may  
first need to deactivate those features before you can make an  
emergency call. Consult your User Manual and your local cellular  
service provider. When making an emergency call, remember to  
give all the necessary information as accurately as possible.  
Remember that your mobile device may be the only means of  
communication at the scene of an accident; do not cut off the call  
until given permission to do so.  
Emergency Calls  
This mobile device, like any wireless mobile device, operates  
using radio signals, wireless and landline networks, as well as  
user-programmed functions, which cannot guarantee connection  
in all conditions, areas, or circumstances. Therefore, you should  
never rely solely on any wireless mobile device for essential  
communications (medical emergencies, for example). Before  
traveling in remote or underdeveloped areas, plan an alternate  
method of contacting emergency services personnel. Remember,  
to make or receive any calls, the mobile device must be switched  
on and in a service area with adequate signal strength.  
Care and Maintenance  
Your mobile device is a product of superior design and  
craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions  
below will help you fulfill any warranty obligations and allow you  
to enjoy this product for many years:  
Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile  
device networks or when certain network services and/or mobile  
device features are in use. Check with local service providers.  
Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:  
Liquids of any kind  
To make an emergency call:  
1. If the phone is not on, switch it on.  
Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and  
liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If  
the mobile device does get wet, do not accelerate drying with  
the use of an oven, microwave, or dryer, because this may  
damage the mobile device and could cause a fire or  
explosion. Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand.  
Doing so may cause an electric shock to you or damage to  
the mobile device.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
. Enter the emergency  
number for your present location (for example, 911 or  
other official emergency number), then tap  
Emergency numbers vary by location.  
.
Call  
223  
       
Extreme heat or cold  
Responsible Listening  
Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C / 113°F.  
Caution!: Avoid potential hearing loss  
.
Microwaves  
Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud  
sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as sound is  
played louder and for longer durations. Prolonged exposure to  
loud sounds (including music) is the most common cause of  
preventable hearing loss. Some scientific research suggests that  
using portable audio devices, such as portable music players and  
cell phones, at high volume settings for long durations may lead  
to permanent noise-induced hearing loss. This includes the use  
of headphones (including headsets, earbuds, and Bluetooth® or  
other wireless devices). Exposure to very loud sound has also  
been associated in some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the  
ear), hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual  
susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential hearing  
problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound produced by a  
portable audio device varies depending on the nature of the  
sound, the device settings, and the headphones that are used. As  
a result, there is no single volume setting that is appropriate for  
everyone or for every combination of sound, settings, and  
equipment.  
Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven.  
Doing so may cause a fire or explosion.  
Dust and dirt  
Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand.  
Cleaning solutions  
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong  
detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft  
cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water solution.  
Shock or vibration  
Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough  
handling can break internal circuit boards.  
Paint  
Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the device’s  
moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent proper  
operation.  
Health and Safety Information  
224  
   
You should follow some common sense recommendations when  
using any portable audio device:  
any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your portable audio  
device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.  
Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into an  
audio source.  
You can obtain additional information on this subject from the  
following sources:  
Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest volume at  
which you can hear adequately.  
American Academy of Audiology  
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300  
Reston, VA 20190  
Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time, not  
realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your hearing.  
When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot hear the  
people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to you can hear  
what you are listening to.  
Voice: (800) 222-2336  
Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you  
choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment, use  
noise-cancelling headphones to block out background environmental  
noise. By blocking background environment noise, noise cancelling  
headphones should allow you to hear the music at lower volumes than  
when using earbuds.  
National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders  
National Institutes of Health  
31 Center Drive, MSC 2320  
Bethesda, MD 20892-2320  
Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less time  
is required before you hearing could be affected.  
Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises, such  
as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss. Temporary  
hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound normal.  
Internet: http://www.nidcd.nih.gov/  
Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you  
experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or experience  
225  
Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic Devices  
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH)  
395 E Street, S.W.  
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio  
Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic equipment  
may not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless  
mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to discuss alternatives.  
Suite 9200  
Patriots Plaza Building  
Implantable Medical Devices  
Washington, DC 20201  
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH (1-800-356-4674)  
1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)  
Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328  
A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained  
between a handheld wireless mobile device and an implantable  
medical device, such as a pacemaker or implantable cardioverter  
defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the device.  
Persons who have such devices:  
Internet: http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/default.html  
1-888-232-6348 TTY  
Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches from  
their implantable medical device when the mobile device is turned ON;  
Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;  
Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to  
minimize the potential for interference;  
Operating Environment  
Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area,  
and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is  
forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or danger.  
When connecting the mobile device or any accessory to another  
device, read its user's guide for detailed safety instructions. Do  
not connect incompatible products.  
Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any reason  
to suspect that interference is taking place;  
Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of your  
implantable medical device. If you have any questions about using  
your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical device,  
consult your health care provider.  
Health and Safety Information  
226  
   
Potentially Explosive Environments  
For more information see: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-  
faqs.html#  
.
Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a potentially  
explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks  
in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily  
injury or even death. Users are advised to switch the mobile  
device off while at a refueling point (service station). Users are  
reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio  
equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and distribution areas),  
chemical plants, or where blasting operations are in progress.  
Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not  
always, clearly marked. They include below deck on boats,  
chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied  
petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), areas where the air  
contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal  
powders, and any other area where you would normally be  
advised to turn off your vehicle engine.  
Other Medical Devices  
If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the  
manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately  
shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able to  
assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your mobile  
device off in health care facilities when any regulations posted in  
these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care  
facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to  
external RF energy.  
Vehicles  
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately  
shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with the  
manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle before  
using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You should also  
consult the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added  
to your vehicle.  
Posted Facilities  
Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted notices  
require you to do so.  
227  
use a rated mobile device successfully. Trying out the mobile  
device with your hearing device is the best way to evaluate it for  
your personal needs.  
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)  
Regulations for Wireless Devices  
On July 10, 2003, the U.S. Federal Communications Commission  
(FCC) Report and Order in WT Docket 01-309 modified the  
exception of wireless mobile devices under the Hearing Aid  
Compatibility Act of 1988 (HAC Act) to require digital wireless  
mobile devices be compatible with hearing aids.  
M-Ratings: Mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet FCC  
requirements and are likely to generate less interference to  
hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. M4 is  
the better/higher of the two ratings.  
T-Ratings: Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC requirements  
and are likely to generate less interference to hearing devices  
than mobile devices that are not labeled. T4 is the better/higher  
of the two ratings.  
The intent of the HAC Act is to ensure reasonable access to  
telecommunications services for persons with hearing  
disabilities. While some wireless mobile devices are used near  
some hearing devices (hearing aids and cochlear implants),  
users may detect a buzzing, humming, or whining noise. Some  
hearing devices are more immune than others to this  
interference noise, and mobile devices also vary in the amount of  
interference they generate.  
Hearing devices may also be rated. Your hearing device  
manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you find  
this rating. Higher ratings mean that the hearing device is  
relatively immune to interference noise. The hearing aid and  
wireless mobile device rating values are then added together.  
The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating system  
for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device users find  
mobile devices that may be compatible with their hearing  
devices. Not all mobile devices have been rated. Mobile devices  
that are rated have the rating on their box or a label located on  
the box.  
A sum of 5 is considered acceptable for normal use. A sum of 6  
is considered for best use. If a hearing aid meets the M2 level  
rating and the wireless mobile device meets the M3 level rating,  
the sum of the two values equal M5. This is synonymous for T  
ratings. This should provide the hearing aid user with “normal  
usage” while using their hearing aid with the particular wireless  
mobile device.  
The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending on  
the user's hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing device  
happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not be able to  
Health and Safety Information  
228  
   
“Normal usage” in this context is defined as a signal quality that  
is acceptable for normal operation. The M mark is intended to be  
synonymous with the U mark. The T mark is intended to be  
synonymous with the UT mark. The M and T marks are  
recommended by the Alliance for Telecommunications Industries  
Solutions (ATIS). The U and UT marks are referenced in Section  
20.19 of the FCC Rules.  
The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in the  
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19 standard.  
T3  
+
T2  
=
5
M3  
+
M2  
=
5
Restricting Children's Access to Your  
Mobile Device  
Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with  
it because they could hurt themselves and others, damage the  
mobile device, or make calls that increase your mobile device  
bill.  
HAC/Wi-Fi for Newer Technologies  
This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing aids  
for some of the wireless technologies that it uses. However, there  
may be some newer wireless technologies used in this phone  
that have not been tested yet for use with hearing aids. It is  
important to try the different features of this phone thoroughly  
and in different locations, using your hearing aid or cochlear  
implant, to determine if you hear any interfering noise. Consult  
your service provider or the manufacturer of this phone for  
information on hearing aid compatibility. If you have questions  
about return or exchange policies, consult your service provider  
or phone retailer.  
Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out of  
the reach of small children.  
229  
   
FCC Notice and Cautions  
FCC Notice  
Other Important Safety Information  
Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or install the  
mobile device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be  
dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to the device.  
The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used in  
close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can require you  
to stop using the mobile device if such interference cannot be  
eliminated. Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as  
propane or butane) must comply with the National Fire Protection  
Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy of this standard, contact the  
National Fire Protection Association.  
Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in your  
vehicle are securely mounted.  
Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your  
vehicle is mounted and operating properly.  
Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials  
in the same compartment as the mobile device, its parts, or  
accessories.  
Cautions  
Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not expressly  
approved in this document could void your warranty for this  
equipment and void your authority to operate this equipment.  
Only use approved batteries, antennas, and chargers. The use of  
any unauthorized accessories may be dangerous and void the  
mobile device warranty if said accessories cause damage or a  
defect to the mobile device. Although your mobile device is quite  
sturdy, it is a complex piece of equipment and can be broken.  
Avoid dropping, hitting, bending, or sitting on it.  
For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag  
inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or  
portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air bag or in  
the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is improperly  
installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result.  
Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use of  
wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be dangerous to  
the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate authorities before  
using any function of a mobile device while on an aircraft.  
Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension or  
denial of cell phone services to the offender, or legal action, or both.  
Health and Safety Information  
230  
       
If the phone, battery, charger or any accessory is not working properly,  
take it to your nearest qualified service facility. The personnel there  
will assist you, and if necessary, arrange for service.  
Dispose of phones in accordance with local regulations. In some areas,  
the disposal of phones in household or business trash may be  
prohibited. For safe disposal options for phones, contact your nearest  
Samsung authorized service center.  
231  
Section 14: Warranty Information  
Standard Limited Warranty  
dents and cosmetic damage, unless caused by SAMSUNG; (c) defects or  
damage resulting from excessive force or use of a metallic object when  
pressing on a touch screen; (d) equipment that has the serial number or  
the enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged, altered or  
made illegible; (e) ordinary wear and tear; (f) defects or damage  
resulting from the use of Product in conjunction or connection with  
accessories, products, or ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or  
approved by SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from improper  
testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or adjustment not  
furnished or approved by SAMSUNG; (h) defects or damage resulting  
from external causes such as collision with an object, fire, flooding, dirt,  
windstorm, lightning, earthquake, exposure to weather conditions, theft,  
blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source; (i) defects or  
damage resulting from cellular signal reception or transmission, or  
viruses or other software problems introduced into the Product; or (j)  
Product used or purchased outside the United States. This Limited  
Warranty covers batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of  
rated capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does not  
cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged by a battery charger  
not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for charging the battery; (ii) any  
of the seals on the battery are broken or show evidence of tampering; or  
(iii) the battery has been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG  
phone for which it is specified.  
What is Covered and For How Long?  
SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC ("SAMSUNG")  
warrants that SAMSUNG's handsets and accessories  
("Products") are free from defects in material and workmanship  
under normal use and service for the period commencing upon  
the date of purchase by the first consumer purchaser and  
continuing for the following specified period of time after that  
date:  
Phone  
1 Year  
1 Year  
90 Days  
1 Year  
Batteries  
Case/Pouch/Holster  
Other Phone Accessories  
What is Not Covered?  
This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the Product.  
This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage resulting  
from accident, misuse, abnormal use, abnormal conditions, improper  
storage, exposure to liquid, moisture, dampness, sand or dirt, neglect, or  
unusual physical, electrical or electromechanical stress; (b) scratches,  
Warranty Information  
232  
       
What are SAMSUNG's Obligations?  
SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this  
Limited Warranty, you must pay all parts, shipping, and labor  
charges for the repair or return of such Product.  
During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product is  
returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited Warranty,  
SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product, at SAMSUNG'S sole  
option, without charge. SAMSUNG may, at SAMSUNG's sole  
option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new parts or components  
when repairing any Product, or may replace the Product with a  
rebuilt, reconditioned or new Product. Repaired/replaced cases,  
pouches and holsters will be warranted for a period of ninety (90)  
days. All other repaired/replaced Products will be warranted for  
a period equal to the remainder of the original Limited Warranty  
on the original Product or for ninety (90) days, whichever is  
longer. All replaced Products, parts, components, boards and  
equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. Except to  
any extent expressly allowed by applicable law, transfer or  
assignment of this Limited Warranty is prohibited.  
You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of the  
Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for warranty  
service.  
What Are The Limits On SAMSUNG’s liability?  
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF SAMSUNG'S  
RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING THE  
PRODUCTS. ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT  
LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS  
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS  
LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR  
DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR  
FOR, WITHOUT LIMITATION, COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT; LOSS OF  
USE, TIME, DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY, GOODWILL, PROFITS OR  
SAVINGS; INCONVENIENCE; INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR  
PUNITIVE DAMAGES; OR DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR  
INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS  
DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY  
LASTS, OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND  
DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.  
What must you do to obtain warranty service?  
To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, you must return  
the Product to an authorized phone service facility in an adequate  
container for shipping, accompanied by the sales receipt or  
comparable proof of sale showing the original date of purchase,  
the serial number of the Product and the seller's name and  
address. To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product,  
please call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1-888-987-4357. If  
233  
SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS, EXPRESS  
OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO THE QUALITY,  
CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE OR SUITABILITY OF ANY  
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH  
THE PRODUCT, OR THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH THIRD-PARTY  
SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT  
DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE. RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE  
QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY  
OF ANY SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS SOLELY  
WITH THE USER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF  
SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT.  
What is the procedure for resolving disputes?  
ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS  
LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR  
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED  
EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION, AND  
NOT BY A COURT OR JURY. Any such dispute shall not be  
combined or consolidated with a dispute involving any other  
person's or entity's Product or claim, and specifically, without  
limitation of the foregoing, shall not under any circumstances  
proceed as part of a class action. The arbitration shall be  
conducted before a single arbitrator, whose award may not  
exceed, in form or amount, the relief allowed by the applicable  
law. The arbitration shall be conducted according to the  
American Arbitration Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration  
Rules applicable to consumer disputes. This arbitration provision  
is entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of  
the State of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws  
principles, shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty  
and all disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The  
arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and application  
of this arbitration provision and the Limited Warranty.  
Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be construed to  
create an express warranty of any kind with respect to the Products. No  
agent, employee, dealer, representative or reseller is authorized to  
modify or extend this Limited Warranty or to make binding  
representations or claims, whether in advertising, presentations or  
otherwise, on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited  
Warranty.  
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also  
have other rights that vary from state to state.  
For any arbitration in which your total damage claims, exclusive  
of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are $5,000.00 or less  
("Small Claim"), the arbitrator may, if you prevail, award your  
reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs as part  
Warranty Information  
234  
of any award, but may not grant SAMSUNG its attorney fees,  
expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that the claim  
was brought in bad faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be  
required to pay no more than half of the total administrative,  
facility and arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is  
less, and SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees.  
Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in  
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees and  
expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 ("Large Claim") shall be  
determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim case, the  
arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or apportion among  
the parties, reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and  
costs. Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator's award in any  
court of competent jurisdiction.  
number; and (d) the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if  
you have it (the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on  
the Product box; (ii) on the Product information screen, which can  
be found under "Settings;" (iii) on a label on the back of the  
Product beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on  
the outside of the Product if the battery is not removable).  
Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no later  
than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer  
purchaser's purchase of the Product and providing the same  
information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be  
effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting out  
of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the coverage of  
the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will continue to enjoy the  
benefits of the Limited Warranty.  
This arbitration provision also applies to claims against  
SAMSUNG'S employees, representatives and affiliates if any  
such claim arises from the Product's sale, condition or  
performance.  
Severability  
If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or  
unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall not  
affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited Warranty.  
You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by providing  
notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days from the date of  
the first consumer purchaser's purchase of the Product. To opt out,  
you must send notice by e-mail to [email protected], with  
the subject line: "Arbitration Opt Out." You must include in the opt  
out e-mail (a) your name and address; (b) the date on which the  
Product was purchased; (c) the Product model name or model  
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC  
1301 E. Lookout Drive  
Richardson, Texas 75082  
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG  
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)  
©
2011 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. All rights reserved.  
235  
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior written  
approval. Specifications and availability subject to change without  
notice. [060111]  
the Software available over a network where it could be used by  
multiple computers at the same time. You may make one copy of  
the Software in machine-readable form for backup purposes  
only; provided that the backup copy must include all copyright or  
other proprietary notices contained on the original.  
End User License Agreement for Software  
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License Agreement  
("EULA") is a legal agreement between you (either an individual  
or a single entity) and Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. for software  
owned by Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. and its affiliated  
companies and its third party suppliers and licensors that  
accompanies this EULA, which includes computer software and  
may include associated media, printed materials, "online" or  
electronic documentation ("Software"). BY CLICKING THE "I  
ACCEPT" BUTTON (OR IF YOU BYPASS OR OTHERWISE DISABLE  
THE "I ACCEPT", AND STILL INSTALL, COPY, DOWNLOAD,  
ACCESS OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE), YOU AGREE TO  
BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT  
ACCEPT THE TERMS IN THIS EULA, YOU MUST CLICK THE  
"DECLINE" BUTTON, DISCONTINUE USE OF THE SOFTWARE.  
2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung reserves  
all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA. The Software  
is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and  
treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the title, copyright and  
other intellectual property rights in the Software. The Software is  
licensed, not sold.  
3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse  
engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to  
discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software (except  
and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by  
applicable law notwithstanding this limitation), or modify, or  
disable any features of, the Software, or create derivative works  
based on the Software. You may not rent, lease, lend, sublicense  
or provide commercial hosting services with the Software.  
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung grants you the following rights  
provided that you comply with all terms and conditions of this  
EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run one copy of  
the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other permanent storage  
media of one computer and use the Software on a single  
computer or a mobile device at a time, and you may not make  
4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung and its  
affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered as  
part of the product support services related to the Software  
provided to you, if any, related to the Software. Samsung may  
use this information solely to improve its products or to provide  
Warranty Information  
236  
 
customized services or technologies to you and will not disclose  
this information in a form that personally identifies you.  
apply to the Software, including the U.S. Export Administration  
Regulations, as well as end user, end use, and destination  
restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments.  
5. UPGRADES. This EULA applies to updates, supplements and  
add-on components (if any) of the Software that Samsung may  
provide to you or make available to you after the date you obtain  
your initial copy of the Software, unless we provide other terms  
along with such upgrade. To use Software identified as an  
upgrade, you must first be licensed for the Software identified by  
Samsung as eligible for the upgrade. After upgrading, you may  
no longer use the Software that formed the basis for your  
upgrade eligibility.  
8. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your  
rights under this License will terminate automatically without  
notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the terms  
and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this EULA, you  
shall cease all use of the Software and destroy all copies, full or  
partial, of the Software.  
9. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES. You expressly acknowledge  
and agree that use of the Software is at your sole risk and that  
the entire risk as to satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy  
and effort is with you. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY  
APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND  
WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND  
SAMSUNG AND ITS LICENSORS (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO AS  
"SAMSUNG" FOR THE PURPOSES OF SECTIONS 9, 10 and 11)  
HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH  
RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR  
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF  
SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, OF FITNESS  
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY,  
OF ACCURACY, OF LACK OF VIRUSES, OF QUIET ENJOYMENT,  
AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SAMSUNG  
6. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or the  
rights to the Software granted herein to any third party unless it  
is in connection with the sale of the mobile device which the  
Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer must include  
all of the Software (including all component parts, the media and  
printed materials, any upgrades, this EULA) and you may not  
retain any copies of the Software. The transfer may not be an  
indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the  
end user receiving the Software must agree to all the EULA  
terms.  
7. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the Software is  
subject to export restrictions of various countries. You agree to  
comply with all applicable international and national laws that  
237  
DOES NOT WARRANT AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR  
ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE, THAT THE FUNCTIONS  
CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR  
THE SOFTWARE, OR OTHERWISE UNDER OR IN CONNECTION  
WITH ANY PROVISION OF THIS EULA, HOWEVER CAUSED,  
REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT  
OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF  
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO  
NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR PERSONAL  
INJURY, OR OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO  
THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.  
REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL  
BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE  
SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN  
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY SAMSUNG OR A SAMSUNG  
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY.  
SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE  
ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR  
CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE  
EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON  
APPLICABLE STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THESE  
EXCLUSIONS AND LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.  
11. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. Notwithstanding any damages that  
you might incur for any reason whatsoever (including, without  
limitation, all damages referenced herein and all direct or general  
damages in contract or anything else), the entire liability of  
Samsung under any provision of this EULA and your exclusive  
remedy hereunder shall be limited to the greater of the actual  
damages you incur in reasonable reliance on the Software up to  
the amount actually paid by you for the Software or US$5.00. The  
foregoing limitations, exclusions and disclaimers (including  
Sections 9, 10 and 11) shall apply to the maximum extent  
permitted by applicable law, even if any remedy fails its essential  
purpose.  
10. EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL AND CERTAIN  
OTHER DAMAGES. TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN  
NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY,  
OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, OR FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF  
DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR FOR ANY PECUNIARY  
DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO YOUR  
USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, THE PROVISION OF  
OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT OR OTHER SERVICES,  
INFORMATION, SOFTWARE, AND RELATED CONTENT THROUGH  
THE SOFTWARE OR OTHERWISE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF  
12. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS. The Software is licensed  
only with "restricted rights" and as "commercial items"  
consisting of "commercial software" and "commercial software  
documentation" with only those rights as are granted to all other  
end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.  
Warranty Information  
238  
13. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of  
TEXAS, without regard to conflicts of laws principles. This EULA  
shall not be governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for the  
International Sale of Goods, the application of which is expressly  
excluded. If a dispute, controversy or difference is not amicably  
settled, it shall be finally resolved by arbitration in Seoul, Korea in  
accordance with the Arbitration Rules of the Korean Commercial  
Arbitration Board. The award of arbitration shall be final and  
binding upon the parties.  
Customer Care Center for an Extended File System (EFS) Clear  
which will eliminate all user memory and return all settings to  
default settings. Please contact the Samsung Customer Care  
Center for details.  
Important!: Please provide warranty information (proof of purchase) to  
Samsung’s Customer Care Center in order to provide this service  
at no charge. If the warranty has expired on the device, charges  
may apply.  
Customer Care Center:  
14. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the entire  
agreement between you and Samsung relating to the Software  
and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or written  
communications, proposals and representations with respect to  
the Software or any other subject matter covered by this EULA. If  
any provision of this EULA is held to be void, invalid,  
unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions shall continue in full  
force and effect.  
1000 Klein Rd.  
Plano, TX 75074  
Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357)  
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC:  
1301 East Lookout Drive  
Richardson, Texas 75082  
Precautions for Transfer and Disposal  
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using the  
standard methods, the data only appears to be removed on a  
superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to retrieve  
and reuse the data by means of special software.  
Important!: If you are using a handset other than a standard numeric keypad,  
dial the numbers listed in brackets.  
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)  
To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of this  
sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to Samsung’s  
©
2011 Samsung Telecommunications America. All rights  
reserved.  
239  
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior written  
approval. Specifications and availability subject to change  
without notice.  
Warranty Information  
240  
Index  
Set as 126  
AllShare  
Google Maps 40, 140  
Memo 40  
memo 145  
Messaging 40  
messaging 145  
TeleNav GPS 42, 153  
Using the Camcorder 120  
Using the Camera 112  
Video Player 42, 155  
Voice Recorder 42, 156  
Voice Search 43, 156  
YouTube 43, 157  
Applications and Development 130  
Ask on Connection 201  
Auto Redial 188  
Auto Reject 187  
Auto-sync  
Numerics  
2G Network  
Configuring Settings 131  
Receiving Media 132  
Transmitting Media 132  
Amazon Kindle 37  
Amazon MP3 133  
Answering a call 54  
Answering Call 187  
Application cache and data  
Clearing 144  
Using 186  
3G Network 186  
Using 186  
4G Network 186  
Using 186  
A
Accessing  
Recently-used applications 36  
Voice mail 17  
Accounts and syncronization 130  
Add 2 sec Pause 56  
Add to Home  
Shortcuts 130  
Add to Slideshow 119  
Adjusting  
Application Menus  
Navigating through 34  
Applications 36  
Android Market 40, 142  
Browser 43, 157  
Calculator 37, 134  
Calendar 37  
Enabling 201  
Camera 38, 136  
B
Call volume 62  
Adobe PDF 154  
Alarm  
Downloads 38  
Back up  
Email 38, 138  
My Data 203  
Backup and Restore 203  
Google Books 37  
Setting 177  
Google Mail 39, 138  
Alarm Tone  
241  
   
Battery  
Charging 11  
Extending Life 13  
Installing 10  
Low Battery Indicator 12  
Removal 10  
Saving Power 13  
Wall Charger 11  
Battery Cover  
Removal 7  
Replace 8  
Battery Life  
Extending 13  
Scan for Devices 166  
Sending Contact Information 167  
Sending Contacts Via 167  
Set Visibility 166  
Calibration 193, 194  
Call  
Ending from Status Bar 53  
Call Barring 188  
Call Forwarding 188  
Call Functions 52  
Answering 54  
Settings 165  
Status indicators 165  
Switching to Headset during call 63  
Turning on and off 165  
Visible Timeout 166  
Ending 52  
Ending a Call 52  
Making a Multi-Party Call 63  
Pause Dialing 56  
Redialing the last number 57  
Wait dialing 57  
Browser  
Adding bookmarks 162  
Deleting bookmarks 162  
Emptying cookies 162  
Entering a URL 160  
Navigation 160  
Battery Use & Safety 218  
Bing  
Call Logs 66  
Accessing 66  
Set Search Engine 164  
Block List 68  
Bluetooth  
Options 160  
Search Engine 164  
Settings 163  
Accessing from Notifications 67  
Altering Numbers 68  
Erasing 69  
About 164  
Bubble  
Options 101  
Call Settings 187  
General 187  
Voice Calls 188  
Call Volume  
Adjusting 62  
Change Name 165  
Deleting a Paired Device 167  
Disable 165  
Disconnecting a Paired Device 167  
Enable 137, 165  
Paring Devices 166  
C
Calendar 176  
Creating an event 176  
Manually Sync Events 135  
Settings 176  
Call Waiting 65, 188  
242  
Caller Ringtone  
Set as 126  
Calling  
Using Wi-Fi 59  
Calls  
Making a 52  
Multi-party 63  
Muting 63  
Camcorder 120  
Accessing the Video Folder 120  
Camcorder Options 120  
Options 115  
Connections  
Accessing the Internet 159  
Contact  
Copying to microSD Card 92  
Copying to SIM Card 91  
Creating a New 82  
Joining 88  
New From Keypad 83  
Contact Entry  
First Name First 93  
Groups 96  
Last Name First 93  
Qik 154  
Sending 90  
Sending All 90  
Setting Default Location 87  
Settings 95  
Contacts List 52  
Context Menus 85, 87  
Navigation 35  
Options 88  
Contact Image  
Set as 119  
Using 35  
Settings 116  
Contact List  
Cookies  
Shooting Video 120  
Camera 112  
Camera Options 113  
Options 113  
Taking Pictures 112  
Car Home 136  
Care and Maintenance 223  
Charging battery 11  
Children and Cell Phones 214  
Clearing  
Options 86  
Contact Menus  
Options 87  
Contacts  
Adding a Number to Existing 86  
Adding Your Facebook Friends 94  
Additional Options 95  
Default Storage Location 95  
Deleting 86  
Display Options 93  
Displaying Contacts by Name 93  
Filtering 93  
Emptying 162  
Copying Contact 91  
Corporate Email  
Account Syncronization 203  
Add Account 203  
Creating a Playlist 127  
Creating and sending  
Messages 98  
Customizing  
Screens 43  
Application cache and data 144  
243  
Email 104  
Add Signature 106  
D
F
Data Roaming 185  
Deleting  
Multiple messages 102  
Facebook 117  
Qik 154  
Composing 105  
Configuring Settings 106  
Creating an Account 104  
Internet Email 104  
Opening 105  
Opening Internet Email 105  
Refreshing Messages 105  
Sending 95  
Emergency Calls 223  
Ending  
A call 52  
Entering Text 70  
Using SWYPE 71  
Erasing files from  
Memory card 51  
Exchange Email 107  
Account Setup 107  
Composing 108  
Configuring Settings 109  
Deleting Message 108  
Opening 108  
Refreshing Messages 108  
Exposure to RF Signals 211  
Factory Data Reset 51, 204  
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)  
Regulations for Wireless Devices 228  
FCC Notice and Cautions 230  
FCC Part 15 217  
Fixed Dialing Numbers 188  
Flight Mode 23  
Single message 102  
Deleting a contact 86  
Desk Home 137  
Display  
Icons 23  
Settings 23  
Status Bar 23  
Folder  
Display / Touch-Screen 221  
Displaying your phone number 52  
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?  
Creating and Managing 47  
Deleting 47  
Renaming 47  
Font  
Style 192  
Font Size  
Downloading  
New application 143  
Downloads 137  
Internet Downloads 137  
Other Downloads 137  
DriveSmart  
Caption 158  
G
Gallery  
Folder Options 117  
Image Options 118  
Opening 122  
Handsfree 137  
E
EDGE Network 186  
Get Friends 93  
244  
Getting Started 6  
Battery 10  
Google mail  
see also Gmail 110  
Home Screen Wallpaper 192  
Set as 119  
Battery Cover 7  
Google Maps  
Setting 117  
Locking/Unlocking the Phone 14  
microSD card 9  
SIM Card 8  
Switching Phone On/Off 14  
Voice Mail 16  
Enabling a location source 141  
Opening a map 141  
Google Talk 41, 152  
GPS & AGPS 222  
Groups  
Adding an Member to an Existing  
Group 96  
Creating a new caller group 96  
Editing a caller group 96  
Removing an Entry 96  
Settings 96  
Horizontal Calibration 193, 194  
HSPA+ 174  
I
Icons  
Description 23  
Indicator 23  
Status 23  
Images  
Gmail 110, 138  
Composing a message 110  
Opening 110  
Refreshing 110  
Signing In 110  
Viewing 111  
Google  
Account Management Settings 202  
Account Syncronization 202  
Add Account 202  
Adding a Sync Account 202  
Create New Account 15  
Retrieving Password 16  
Set Search Engine 164  
Signing into Your Account 16  
Sync Books 202  
Assigning as a Contact icon 119  
Assigning as wallpaper 119  
Importing and Exporting  
To SIM card 95  
In call  
Options 61, 63  
INCEPTION 123, 139  
Incoming Call Volume  
Setting 191  
Indicator icons 23  
International Call 56  
International calls  
Making 56  
GSM 185  
H
Handsfree 137  
Health and Safety Information 211  
History tab 97  
Hold  
Placing a call on hold 62  
Home 30  
Home Key 27  
Home Screen  
Overview 30  
Google Books 134  
245  
Internet 159  
Search 161  
Managing Applications 198  
Clearing Application Cache 198  
Moving Third-party Applications to  
Card 199  
Uninstalling Third-party Applications  
Market 142  
Marking contact  
As a default 90  
Mass Storage 201  
Media Hub 123  
Creating a New Account 124  
Using 124  
Media Volume  
Setting 191  
Memo  
Options 145  
Memory card  
Erasing files from the 51  
Message  
Options 99  
Read 100  
Message threads 101  
Messaging  
Creating and sending 98  
Creating and Sending Text  
Messages 98  
Deleting a message 102  
Google Mail 110  
Icons on the Status Bar 98  
Insert Smiley 100  
Options 99  
Internet Downloads 137  
Internet Email 104  
J
Joining  
Contact information 88  
K
Kies  
Prior to Using 169  
Kies Mini 169  
Kodak 121  
Settings 102  
Signing into Google Mail 110  
Text Templates 103  
Types of Messages 98  
Viewing new 100  
microSD Card  
L
Lock Screen  
Viewing Missed Calls 69  
Lock Screen Wallpaper 192  
Set as 119  
Setting 117  
Low battery indicator 12  
Insertion 9  
Removal 10  
Microsoft Exchange 104  
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync 82  
Mini Diary  
Deleting an entry 146  
Options 146  
M
Making  
International calls 56  
New call 52  
Reply 101  
Threads 101  
Settings 146  
Message Search 102  
246  
Missed Call  
Viewing from Lock Screen 69  
Editing a Playlist 128  
Options 126  
Notification Volume  
Setting 191  
Mobile AP 174  
Activating 174  
Connecting 174  
Securing 175  
Playing Music 125  
Removing music 127  
Using Playlists 127  
My Profile 94  
O
On/off switch 14  
Operating Environment 226  
Organizer  
Mobile Networks 184  
Data Roaming 185  
Mobile NetworksUse Packet Data 185  
Mobile Web 159  
Entering Text in the Mobile Web  
Browser 160  
Navigating with the Mobile Web 160  
Using Bookmarks 161  
mounting the SD card 50  
Move to USB storage 199  
Multi-Party Call 63  
Dropping One Participant 65  
Private conversation 64  
Multi-party call  
N
Calculator 134  
Namecard  
Send Via 90  
Sending 90  
Sending All 90  
World Clock 178  
Other Downloads 137  
Other Important Safety Information 230  
Outlook 104  
Synchronizing 203  
Overview  
Navigating  
Application Menus 34  
Sub-Menus 35  
Through Screens 32  
Network connection  
Adding a new 172  
Network Mode  
2G Network 186  
3G Network 186  
New applications  
Downloading 143  
News and Weather 151  
Notification Bar 26  
Using 26  
Home Screen 30  
P
Pause Dialing 56  
Phone  
Icons 23  
Switching on/off 14  
Phone number  
Finding 52  
Phone Options 191  
Phone Ringtone 191  
Set as 126  
Setting up 64  
Multi-party calls 63  
Music Player 125  
Adding music 127  
Creating a playlist 127  
247  
Photos  
Options 117  
Setting As 117  
Sharing 117  
Reducing Exposure  
Hands-Free Kits and Other  
Accessories 214  
Reject Call  
With Message 188  
Reject List 68  
Reset 204  
Responsible Listening 224  
Restore 203  
Navigation 32  
Screen Lock 195  
Screen Rotation  
Auto-Rotate 192  
Screen Timeout 193  
Screens  
Adding and Deleting 44  
Rearranging 44  
SD card  
Pico TTS 209  
Power Control 13  
Power Saving Mode 193  
Predictive text  
Using XT9 79  
Prefix Dialing 54  
Adding Prefix 55  
Deleting 55  
Primary Shortcuts 31  
Adding and Deleting 44  
Q
Qik 154  
Recording Video 155  
Settings 154  
QWERTY  
Changing the Input Type 77  
Restricting Children's Access to Your  
Mobile device 229  
Ringtone  
mounting the 50  
Unmounting 50  
Search Engine 164  
Select Locale 205  
Sending a Namecard 90  
Setting an alarm 177  
Setting up  
Voicemail 16  
Settings 180  
Browser 163  
Contact list 95  
Phone 191  
S
Samsung Keyboard  
Settings 206  
XT9 Advanced Settings 207  
Samsung Kies 201  
Samsung Products and Recycling 220  
SAR Certification Information 215  
Save a Number  
From Keypad 83  
Screen  
Customization 43  
Home 30  
Display 23  
R
Enabling the GPS Satellites 194  
Enabling the sensor aiding 194  
Enabling wireless network locations  
Recently-used Applications  
Accessing 36  
Redialing the last number 57  
248  
Messaging 102  
Mini Diary 146  
Shortcuts  
Adding from Application Screen 45  
Adding from Home Screen 46  
Deleting from a Screen 46  
Managing 45  
Removing an entry 58  
Setting up entries 58  
Standard Limited Warranty 232  
Status Bar 23  
Sub-Menus  
Navigation 35  
Switching to a Bluetooth  
During a call 63  
Swype  
T
Tethering 173, 183  
Activating 173, 183  
Active Icon 173, 183  
Disconnecting 173, 183  
Text Input  
Methods 70  
Text Input Method  
Selecting 70  
Primary 31  
SIM Card  
Changing Exisitng PIN 197  
Importing and Exporting 95  
Insertion 8  
Lock 196  
Removal 9  
SIM Card Lock  
Setting Up 196  
Smart Practices While Driving 217  
Snapfish 121  
Song  
Set as 126  
Speakerphone  
Turning on and off 62  
Speed Dial  
Changing an entry 58  
Making a call 59  
Advanced Settings 71, 206  
Entering text using 71  
Help 206  
Selecting a Text Input 72  
Settings 71, 205  
Text Entry Tips 72  
Tutorial 206  
Swype Keyboard  
Using 71  
Sync Books 202  
System Volume  
Setting 191  
Text Templates 103  
Create Your Own 104  
Text-to-speech  
Configuration 208  
Third-Party Applications 199  
Uninstalling 144  
Time Management  
Calendar 176  
T-Mobile Contacts Backup 82  
Tools  
Camera 112  
Transferring Music Files 128  
TTY Mode 190  
TV Out 193  
Connecting your Phone to TV 193  
249  
Twitter  
Qik 154  
USB Tethering  
Drivers 169  
Voice mail  
Accessing 17  
Use GPS Satellites 141, 194  
Use Packet Data 185  
Use Sensor Aiding 141, 194  
Use Wireless Networks 141, 194  
Using Favorites  
Adding Favorites 162  
Deleting a Favorite 162  
Editing Favorites 162  
V
Accessing from another phone 17  
Setting up 16  
Volume Settings  
Adjusting 191  
VPN  
U
UL Certified Travel Charger 221  
Understanding Your Phone 19  
Back View 22  
Display 22  
Features 19  
Front View 20  
Home 30  
Adding 183  
Settings 183  
W
Uninstalling  
Wait 57  
Third-party applications 144  
Unmounting  
Vibrate 191  
Wait dialing 57  
Wallpapers  
Vibration  
SD card 50  
Intensity 192  
Changing 48  
Updates tab 97  
USB Connection  
Turn Off 50  
Setup 191  
Video Chat 154  
Settings 154  
Managing 48  
Warranty Information 232  
WCDMA 185  
Turn On 50  
Video Player 117  
Videos  
Options 117  
Visible Timeout 166  
Voice Actions 29  
Voice dialer  
Web 159  
History 163  
USB Connections  
As mass storage device 168  
USB Debugging  
Enabling 170  
USB Settings  
As mass storage device 168  
Windows Meida Player 170  
Web applications  
enable downloading 168  
Widgets  
Adding and Removing 46  
Google Talk 41  
Mini Diary 40  
Using 55  
Voice Input Recognition 208  
250  
Moving to a Different Screen 47  
My Account 40  
Settings 41, 152  
Stopwatch 178  
Wi-Fi  
About 171  
Activating 59, 171  
Advanced settings 173  
Calling 59  
Connecting to 171  
Deactivating 172  
Manually scan for network 172  
Status icons 172  
Windows Media Player  
Synchronizing with 170  
World Clock  
DST Settings 178  
WPA2 PSK 175  
Y
Yahoo! 164  
YouTube  
High Qulaity 129  
Qik 154  
Settings 158  
251  

The Singing Machine SMB 637 User Manual
Teac SD 3250N User Manual
Spectra Logic T FINITY User Manual
Seagate ST31621A User Manual
Seagate BARRACUDA ST3160815AS User Manual
Samsung Spinpiont HM160JI User Manual
Samsung KIES GT I5500M User Manual
Samsung Cell Phone III User Manual
Samsung Cell Phone GT I9070 User Manual
Radio Shack 63 251 User Manual